AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
English
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 1 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FEATURES 5
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PREPARATIONS 11
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting Zone B speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting to the jack on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6 Connecting to a network (wired LAN connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
10 Connecting to a network wirelessly
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Attaching the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 38
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
PLAYBACK 42
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 2 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
En 3
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Playing back music in multiple rooms
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Preparing Zone B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
CONFIGURATIONS 76
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . 94
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
APPENDIX 98
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 3 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
Accessories En 4
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
AM antenna FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of
purchase.
YPAO microphone Wireless antenna
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide
Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the HTR-5067/TSR-5770 (U.S.A. model),
unless otherwise specified.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within 6 m (20 ft)
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 4 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 5
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
AV receiver (the unit)
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
TV remote control
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.111
Change the input source
and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)
. p.43
**
* HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone
. p.53
•USB
. p.57
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.60
• Internet radio
. p.64
•AirPlay
. p.67
iPod/iPhone
USB device
Audio
Network contents
Supports 2- to 5.1-channel (to 7.1-channel*)
speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite
acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.38
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert
halls (CINEMA DSP)
. p.45
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.48
• Playing back music in multiple rooms
(Zone B)*
. p.69
3D and 4K Ultra HD signals supported
Wireless connection to a
network*
. p.25
* HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 5 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6
Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.21)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, portable audio player, and other
devices.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.19)
When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input
from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
❑ Easy operation and wireless music
playback from iPhone or Android™ device
By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit our
website for details.
❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.45)
The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you
to create a 3-dimensional sound field in your own room
(CINEMA DSP 3D).
❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed
in front (p.46)
You can enjoy the surround sound even when the
surround speakers are placed in front.
❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.48)
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit
plays back the selected source with the least circuitry,
which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
❑ Low power consumption
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption and helps to create an
eco-friendly home theater system (p.88).
BD/DVD
player
Game
console
Portable
audio
player
TV
Set-top box
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Useful tips
The combination of video/audio input jacks does not
match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack(s) of your external device (p.22).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.86).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.83).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.27).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “Network Update” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu or
“UPDATE” (p.96) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to
update the unit’s firmware.
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• SCENE settings (p.43)
• Sound/video settings and signal information for each
source (p.72)
• Various function settings (p.77)
• System settings (p.94)
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 6 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 7
Front panel
1 z (power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.83)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.83)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.92)
• An iPod is being charged (p.53)
3 YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.38).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.4).
5 INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.71).
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Enters the wireless LAN connection setup (WPS button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.30).
6 MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.50).
7 PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.51).
8 FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.49).
9 TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.49).
0 Front display
Displays information (p.8).
A DIRECT key
Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.48).
B PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
C INPUT keys
Select an input source.
D TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.73).
E SCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.43).
F PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.44).
G STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.47).
H AUX jack
For connecting devices, such as portable audio players
(p.24).
I USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.57) or an iPod
(p.53).
J VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INFO (WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
INPUT
SCENE
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
DIRECT
AUDIO
VOLUME
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
5V 1A
4:A2 3561 789
B
JDFG
IHCE
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 7 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8
Front display (indicators)
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
2 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.48) is
working.
3 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.45) or CINEMA DSP 3D
(p.45) is working.
4 STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
5 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
6 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
7 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
8 ECO
Lights up when the eco mode (p.88) is enabled.
9 Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
0 Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.71).
A Signal strength indicator
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Indicates the strength of the wireless signal (p.28).
B ZONE indicators (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Indicate the zone to which the sound is output (p.70).
C Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)*
J Surround back speaker (R)*
K Surround back speaker*
L Subwoofer
* HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only
D ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.73) is working.
1 2
PARTY
VIRTUAL
23
CHARGE
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
A
ZONE
B
SP IMP.••8 MIN
23 6541 7
9 908 CDB
A
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 8 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9
Rear panel
1 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.24).
2 HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.19). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.
3 HDMI 1–6 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.21).
4 NETWORK jack
For a wired connection to a network (p.25).
5 WIRELESS jack (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
For connecting to the supplied wireless antenna (p.28).
6 Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.26).
7 AV 1–6 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.21).
8 AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.26).
9 MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks:
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.21).
VIDEO jack:
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.21).
0 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770)
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack (HTR-4067)
For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.16).
• (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the
unit.
A DC OUT jack
For supplying power to a Yamaha AV accessory. For details
on connections, refer to the instruction manual of the AV
accessory.
B SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.16).
• The SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks are available on
HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only.
C VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.26).
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
NETWORK
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SPEAKERS
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
RADIO
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
HDMI 5
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
HDMI 6
(
NET
)
WIRELESS
0 AB8
21
3 654
7
C
9
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to prevent
improper connections.
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 U.S.A. model)
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 9 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 TRANSMIT indicator
Lights up when remote control signals are transmitted.
3 SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
4 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
HDMI 1–6 HDMI 1–6 jacks
AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks
AUX AUX jack (on the front panel)
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET Network sources (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
5 Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio (p.49).
FM Switches to FM radio.
AM Switches to AM radio.
MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
6 INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.71).
7 Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.44).
8 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.43).
9 SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.76).
0 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
A MODE key
Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio
reception (p.49).
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.55).
B External device operation keys
Control playback of the iPod (p.53), USB storage device
(p.57) or PCs/NAS (p.60).
Also control playback or operate menus of the playback
devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• The playback devices must support HDMI Control. However,
Yamaha does not assure the operation of all HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
C RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
D ZONE keys
Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A or Zone B (p.70).
• ZONE keys function on HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only.
E OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.72).
F VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
G MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
C
D
E
F
G
1
4
2
3
5
6
8
7
9
:
B
A
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 10 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 11
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.12)
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.
2 Connecting speakers (p.16)
Connect the speakers to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.19)
Connect a TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.21)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.24)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
6
Connecting to a network (wired LAN
connection) (p.25)
Connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable.
7 Connecting recording devices (p.26)
Connect recording devices to the unit.
8 Connecting the power cable (p.26)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
9
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.27)
Select the desired on-screen menu language.
10
Connecting to a network wirelessly
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) (p.28)
Connect the unit to a network wirelessly.
11
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.38)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 11 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 12
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout
examples.
*1 HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only
*2 Place the surround speakers in front and set "Virtual CINEMA FRONT" (p.81) in the "Setup" menu to "On".
• HTR-5067/TSR-5770 supports 2- to 7.1-channel system, and HTR-4067 supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system.
• (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
You can connect two subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds.
1 Placing speakers
Caution
• (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.15).
• (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 Ω.
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Speaker system (the number of channels)
7.1*
1
6.1*
1
5.1
5.1
(Virtual
CINEMA
FRONT)
4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L) 1
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
●●●●●●●
Front (R) 2 ●●●●●●●
Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●●●● ●
Surround (L) 4
Produce surround left/right channel sounds.
●●●
●*
2
●
Surround (R) 5 ●●●
●*
2
●
Surround back (L)*
1
6
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
●
Surround back (R)*
1
7 ●
Surround back*
1
8 Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. ●
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”.
●●●●●●●
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 12 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 13
7.1-channel system (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
6.1-channel system (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
5.1-channel system
5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
• To utilize this configuration, set "Virtual CINEMA FRONT" (p.78) in the "Setup" menu to "On".
• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
45
1
2
399
67
30 cm (1 ft) or
more
10° to 30°10° to 30°
45
1
2
39
8
10° to 30°10° to 30°
45
12
39
10° to 30°10° to 30°
12
39
45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 13 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 14
4.1-channel system
3.1-channel system
2.1-channel system
45
12
9
10° to 30°10° to 30°
12
39
12
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 14 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 15
■ Setting the speaker impedance
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting
6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power).
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
z (power)
STRAIGHT
1 2
PARTY
VIRTUAL
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
ZONE
2A
ZONE
3B
SP IMP.••8¬MIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 15 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
The following diagrams provide connections for 5.1-
and 7.1-channel systems as examples. For other
systems, connect speakers while referring to the
connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system.
Cables required for connection
(commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer)
5.1-channel system 7.1-channel system
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
2 Connecting speakers
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn
off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.
Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front
display when the unit is turned on.
–
+
–
+
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
12
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
• (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
The 2 subwoofers output the same sound.
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
1
67
2
3
45
9
9
The unit (rear)
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
SINGLE jack (L side).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 16 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 17
■ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting
the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and
the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
■ Connecting the subwoofer
(with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Connecting front speakers that
support bi-amp connections
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
When using front speakers that support bi-amp
connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”
(p.79) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting
the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• Surround back speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be used during
bi-amp connections.
• The FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks
output the same signals.
Connecting Zone B speakers
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input
source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A)
and in another room (Zone B). To connect the Zone B
speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)” (p.69).
• Surround back speakers or bi-amplified front speakers cannot be
used while the Zone B function is enabled.
FRONT
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
- (black)
FRONT
a
b
Banana plug
AV
OUT
2
1
Audio pin cable
12
3
45
9
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SPEAKERS
The unit (rear)
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or
cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the
instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not
making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 17 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 18
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission
(through output) features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
■ Video jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B),
and chrominance red (P
R). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
(Stereo L/R jacks)
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
(Stereo mini jack)
Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo
mini-plug cable.
Input/output jacks and cables
HDMI cable
Component video cable
Video pin cable
OPTICAL
Digital optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
Stereo mini-plug cable
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 18 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 19
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can
also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI
cable.
■ HDMI connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
• You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.111).
■ Component / composite video connection
When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to
the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
3 Connecting a TV
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV 4
P
R
A
M
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
AV 1
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
OO
HDMI
OUT
ARC
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
FM
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(
RADIO
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
HDMI 5
DC O
U
5V 0.
5
HDMI 6
HDMI
OUT
ARC
AV 1
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
PR
PB
Y
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video input
(component video)
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 19 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 20
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
FM
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(
RADIO
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
HDMI 5
DC O
U
5V 0.
5
HDMI 6
HDMI
OUT
ARC
VIDEO
V
V
AV 1
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
OO
MONITOR OUT
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
Video input
(composite video)
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 20 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 21
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
– Connecting an iPod (p.53)
– Connecting a USB storage device (p.57)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.22).
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–6, the video/audio played back on
the video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–6 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.19 to 21).
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on
the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.21).
4 Connecting playback devices
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
FM
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(
RADIO
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
HDMI 5
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
HDMI 6
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4
HDMI 5 HDMI 6
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI 1–6 jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog Stereo
You need to change the combination of
video/audio input jacks (p.22).
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV 4
P
R
A
M
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI
OUT
ARC
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
( TV )
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
AV 1
AV 2
O
O
C
C
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital optical or digital coaxial)
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 21 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 22
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.21).
■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You
can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
❑ Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 4–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
Digital optical
You need to change the combination of
video/audio input jacks (p.22).
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
FM
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(
RADIO
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
HDMI 5
HDMI
OUT
ARC
R
L
COAXIAL
R
L
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jack
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital coaxial or analog stereo)
Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack,
AV 4–6 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI 1–6 AV 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI 1–6 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1–6 AV 4–6 (AUDIO)
Component video Analog stereo
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT
VIDEO)
AV 4–6 (AUDIO)
Composite video Digital optical AV 3–6 (VIDEO) AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV 4
P
R
F
M
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HD
M
(
RADIO
)
HDMI
OUT
ARC
AV 5
R
L
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 22 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 23
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
2
Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input
source.
3
Press OPTION.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (
e
/
r
) to select “AV 5” (audio input jack to be
used).
6
Press OPTION.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back
on the video device will be output from the unit.
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on
the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following
connections.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6, the audio played back on the audio
device will be output from the unit.
1234
5 6
AV
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
DISPLAY
ENTER
SETUP
OPTION
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
DISPLAY
SETUP
ENTER
OPTION
1
3
4
5
6
AV
AUX
USB
5
6
B
ZONE A
AV 2
Cursor keys
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Audio In
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Audio••••••AV5
VOL.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit
Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 4–6 (AUDIO)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
FM
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(
RADIO
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
HDMI 5
H
HDMI
OUT
ARC
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
AV 1–6 jacks
The unit (rear)
Audio device
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 23 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 24
Connecting to the jack on the front panel
Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable
audio players to the unit.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing AUX, the audio played back on the
device will be output from the unit.
• You need to prepare the audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.53) or
“Connecting a USB storage device” (p.57).
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
INPUT
SCENE
STRAIGHT
AUDIO
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
5V 1A
Portable audio player
The unit (front)
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
NETWORK
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SPEAKERS
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(
RADIO
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
HDMI 5
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
HDMI 6
(
NET
)
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 24 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network (wired LAN connection) En 25
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
You can also connect the unit to a network wirelessly. For details, see "Connecting to a
network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)" (p.28).
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.91).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
6 Connecting to a network (wired LAN connection)
FRONT CENTER
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
NETWORK
FM
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(
RADIO
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
HDMI 5
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
HDMI 6
(
NET
)
HDMI
OUT
ARC
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 25 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting recording devices En 26
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output analog video/audio signals selected as the input.
• To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 4–6 jacks of the unit.
• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 4–6 jacks or AUX jack of the unit.
• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
7 Connecting recording devices
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
FM
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(
RADIO
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
HDMI 5
HDMI
OUT
ARC
R
L
AUDIO
AV
OUT
VIDEO
V
V
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
Video recording
device
8 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SPEAKERS
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V–
120V
220V–
240V
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SPEAKERS
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 26 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 27
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and
Chinese.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
6
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
English
日本語
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
Italiano
中文
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
English
日本語
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
Italiano
中文
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
TRANSMI
T
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
SETUP
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 27 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 28
Attaching the wireless antenna
Attach the supplied wireless antenna to the unit.
Be sure to turn off the unit before attaching the antenna.
• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage the antenna.
• When attaching the antenna, hold the root of the antenna and screw it into the WIRELESS jack tightly.
• The antenna can be bent in only one direction. Check the orientation of the joint and bend the antenna in
the proper direction.
• Do not connect the antenna other than the supplied one.
• When packing the unit, remove the antenna to prevent damage.
• The signal strength indicator on the front display indicates the strength of the wireless signal.
10 Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
WIRELESS
WIRELESS
WIRELESS
Screw in
Bend
Turn clockwise to the vertical position
Joint
StrongWeak
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 28 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 29
Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
You can also use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control
the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.30).
• You cannot use the wireless LAN connection simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.25) or
Wireless Direct (p.36).
• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.
• For details on "AV CONTROLLER", visit the Yamaha website.
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the
unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.36).
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.25) or the wireless LAN
connection (p.28).
• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the unit cannot connect to the Internet. Therefore, you cannot use any
kind of Internet service such as Internet radio.
• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.
The unit
Wireless router
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
Modem
The unit
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 29 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 30
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
TRANSMI
T
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
ZO
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
SETUP
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.
• You need iOS device with iOS 5.0 or later. For details on supported devices, see
“Supported devices and file formats” (p.109).
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and
press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER.
• The unit may connect automatically to the access point to which it has
connected previously. In this case, the message indicating the successful
connection will appear. You can ignore this message and proceed to the
next step.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Share Wi-Fi
Settings(iOS)” and press ENTER.
Yes
Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPod touch)?
Yes
A (p.30)
B (p.31)
Does your wireless router
(access point) has a WPS
button?
C (p.32)
No
No
Network Connection
Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi)
: ENTEROK
: RETURNBack
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
: RETURNBack
: ENTEROK
Select a setup method.
WPS Button
Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS)
PIN Code
Access Point Scan
Manual Setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 30 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 31
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
I
S
PLA
Y
TRANSMI
T
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
ZO
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
SETUP
8
Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
9
Press ENTER on the remote control.
10
Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
11
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ B: Using the WPS button configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3
seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Connected”
appears on the front display.
If “Connection fail” appears, repeat from step 1 or try
another connection method.
• Depending on the model of the wireless router (access point), the unit may not
connect to it. In this case, try connection with "Access Point Scan" or "Manual
Setting" (p.32).
• You can use “WPS Button” (p.7) in the “Setup” menu to set up a wireless
connection with the WPS button.
AUDIO
AUX
5V 1A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 31 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 32
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
TRANSMI
T
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
ZO
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
SETUP
■ C: Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS button
configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the
wireless network settings.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and
press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER.
• The unit may connect automatically to the access point to which it has
connected previously. In this case, the message indicating the successful
connection will appear. You can ignore this message and proceed to the
next step.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
connection method and press ENTER.
The following connection methods are available.
Network Connection
Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi)
: ENTEROK
: RETURNBack
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the
WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow
the instructions displayed on the TV screen.
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point). The method is available if the
wireless router (access point) supports the WPS
PIN code method. For details on settings, see
“Using the WPS PIN code” (p.33).
Share Wi-Fi
Settings(iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.30).
Access Point
Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by
searching for an access point. For details on
settings, see “Searching for an access point”
(p.33).
Manual Setting
You can setup a wireless connection by entering
the required information (such as SSID)
manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up
the wireless connection manually” (p.34).
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the
Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless
home network.
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
: RETURNBack
: ENTEROK
Select a setup method.
WPS Button
PIN Code
Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS)
Access Point Scan
Manual Setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 32 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 33
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE
B
ZO
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
SETUP
❑ Using the WPS PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
access point and press ENTER.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
2
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).
3
Press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
❑ Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
access point and press ENTER.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
2
Press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key.
Button functions
[←]/[→]: Moves the cursor left and right.
[Aa]: Switches the letter cases (upper/lower).
[BKSP]: Deletes the character to the left of the selected one.
[Space]: Enters a space.
[DEL]: Deletes the selected character.
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the
previous screen.
Enter the PIN code
into the access point.
PIN Code
: RETURNBack
: ENTEROK
PIN Code : 00000000
Access Point Scan
: RETURNCANCEL
: ENTEREdit
SSID:
Security:
Access Point X
WPA-PSK (TKIP)
Connect
Security Key:
Network Connection
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
abc_
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / \ $ ~^´ ’ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - =
← Aa BKSP Space DEL →
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 33 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 34
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try
another connection method.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “SSID” and
press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point.
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the
previous screen.
Manual Setting
: RETURNCANCEL
: ENTEREdit
SSID:
Security:
Access Point X
None
Connect
Security Key:
Network Connection
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
abc_
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / \ $ ~^´ ’ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - =
← Aa BKSP Space DEL →
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE
B
ZO
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
SETUP
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 34 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 35
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and
the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption
method.
Choices
None, WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES),
Mixed Mode
• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key”
and press ENTER.
• If you select “None” in step 3, this item is not available.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key.
If you select “WEP” in step 3, enter either 5 or 13 character
string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.
If you select the method other than “WEP” in step 3, enter
either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the
previous screen.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from step 1.
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Network Connection
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
abc_
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / \ $ ~^´ ’ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - =
← Aa BKSP Space DEL →
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE
B
ZO
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
SETUP
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 35 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 36
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and
press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless
Direct” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and
the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption
method.
Choices
None, WEP
• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key”
and press ENTER.
• If you select “None” in step 7, this item is not available.
9
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key.
Enter any 5 or 13 character string.
When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the
previous screen.
• Before proceeding to the next step, record the following information. These
information will be needed to configure the Wi-Fi setting of a mobile device.
– SSID displayed on the TV screen
– Security key you have just entered
Network Connection
Connection Wireless Direct
: ENTEROK
: RETURNBack
Network Connection
OK
CANCEL
CLEAR
abc_
( ) [ ] { } < > * ! ? # % &
. , : ; _ | / \ $ ~^´ ’ `
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - =
← Aa BKSP Space DEL →
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
TRANSMI
T
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
ZO
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
SETUP
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 36 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 37
10
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Save” and
press ENTER to save the setting.
This completes the settings and “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
Next, configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
11
Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in step 9 from the list of available
access points.
c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in step 9.
12
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE
B
ZO
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
SETUP
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 37 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 38
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children.
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
– Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
• (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp
Assign” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting
YPAO.
4
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the
front panel.
• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
The following screen appears on the TV.
11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
12
3
9
45
Ear height
The unit (front)
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Press SETUP key
to Start
“Power Amp Assign”
setting (p.79)
(HTR-5067/
TSR-5770 only)
Power Amp Assign
Basic
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
I
S
PLAY
ENTER
TRANSMI
T
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 38 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 39
5
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Start” and press SETUP.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to
start the measurement immediately.
• To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the
procedure in “Error messages” (p.40).
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
1 The number of speakers (front side/rear
side/subwoofer)
2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest)
3 Adjustment range of speaker output level
4 Warning message (if available)
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.40) or “Warning messages” (p.41).
• A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in
the front display.
• If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use
the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages.
6
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
1
2
3
4
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
OK:ENTER
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
SAVE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 39 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 40
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
TV screen
Front display
■ Procedure to handle errors
1
Check the content of error message and
press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To exit the YPAO measurement:
a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press
ENTER.
c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
To retry the YPAO measurement from
beginning:
Select “RETRY” and press ENTER.
To proceed with the current YPAO
measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only):
Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER.
Error
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
ERROR
E-5:Noisy
PROCEED
5%
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
E-5:NOISY
VOL.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:No Front SP
(E-1:NO FRNT SP)
Front speakers are not detected.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker
connections.
E-2:No Sur. SP
(E-2:NO SUR SP)
One of the surround speakers cannot be
detected.
E-4:SBR → SBL
(E-4:SBR → SBL)
A surround back speaker is connected to
the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to
connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Exit YPAO, turn off the
unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5:Noisy
(E-5:NOISY)
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and
ignores any noise detected.
E-6:Check Sur.
(E-6:CHECK SUR)
Surround back speakers are connected,
but no surround speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use
surround back speakers. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and
then reconnect the speakers.
E-7:No MIC
(E-7:NO MIC)
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO.
E-8:No Signal
(E-8:NO SIGNAL)
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test
tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9:User Cancel
(E-9:CANCEL)
The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary.
E-10:Internal Err.
(E-10:INTERNAL)
An internal error has occurred.
Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs
repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 40 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
TV screen
Front display
■ Procedure to handle warnings
1
Check the content of warning message
and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To save the measurement results:
Select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
To discard the measurement result:
Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
3
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the
unit.
Warning
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
W-1:Out of Phase
OK:ENTER
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
W-1:PHASE
VOL.
Problem speaker (blinks)
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:Out of Phase
(W-1:PHASE)
A speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this
message may appear even if the speakers are connected
correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2:Over Distance
(W-2:DISTANCE)
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft)
from the listening position.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker
within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position.
W-3:Level Error
(W-3:LEVEL)
There are significant volume differences
between the speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of
each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is
any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect
speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We
recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 41 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 42
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
D
I
S
PLA
Y
ENTER
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
S
LEE
P
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
VOLUME
MUTE
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.49)
• Playing back iPod music (p.53)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.57)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.60)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.64)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.67)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE
CONTROL on the front panel (p.73).
Basic playback procedure
Input selection keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 42 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 43
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
MUTE
D
I
S
PLAY
ENTER
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
SCENE
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and target
zones (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) with just one touch.
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
* HTR-5067/TSR-5770: 7ch Stereo, HTR-4067: 5ch Stereo
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or
start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction
with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.84) in the
“Setup” menu to “On”.
Configuring scene assignments
1
Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.
• Select an input source (p.42)
• Select a sound program (p.44)
• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.48)
• (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B (p.70)
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE Input
Sound
program
Compressed
Music
Enhancer
Target zone
(HTR-5067/
TSR-5770
only)
SCENE
link
playback
BD/DVD HDMI 1
MOVIE
(Sci-Fi)
Off
Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled
On
TV AV 1 STRAIGHT On
Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled
On
NET
NET
RADIO
MUSIC
(7ch/5ch
Stereo*)
On
Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled
Off
RADIO TUNER
MUSIC
(7ch/5ch
Stereo*)
On
Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled
Off
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
SET Complete
VOL.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 43 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 44
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
I
S
PLA
Y
ENTER
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
BASS
ENHANCER
DIRECT
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.45).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.46).
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.47).
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.47).
❑ Switching to the direct playback mode
• Press DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.48).
❑ Enabling Extra Bass
• Press BASS.
This mode lets you enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.48).
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.48).
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM on the front panel.
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz or
playing back DTS Express, the straight decode mode (p.47) is automatically
selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.8).
Selecting the sound mode
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 44 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 45
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.
• You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.73) in the “Option” menu.
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set "CINEMA DSP 3D Mode" (p.85) in the "Setup" menu to "Off".
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Sci-Fi
VOL.
Sound program category
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 45 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 46
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.45) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.46) do not work when "2ch Stereo", "5ch Stereo" or
"7ch Stereo" is selected.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch Stereo) when
no surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound
field using the front-side speakers.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in
front.
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
5ch Stereo
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770: 7ch Stereo, HTR-4067: 5ch Stereo)
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 46 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 47
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
I
S
PLAY
ENTER
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
• (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.73) in the “Option” menu to a
setting other than “Off”.
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.107).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
* HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only
• (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.
• You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.85)
in the “Setup” menu.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
STRAIGHT
VOL.
bPro Logic
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPLII Movie
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic IIx decoder) suitable for movies.
bPLIIx Movie*
bPLII Music
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic IIx decoder) suitable for music.
bPLIIx Music*
bPLII Game
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic IIx decoder) suitable for games.
bPLIIx Game*
Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
†‡Pro Logic
VOL.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 47 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 48
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
I
S
PLA
Y
ENTER
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
BASS
DIRECT
ENHANCER
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(direct playback)
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not
available.
– Selecting sound programs
– Adjusting the tone control
– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)
Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless
of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
subwoofer.
1
Press BASS.
Each time you press the key, Extra Bass is enabled or
disabled.
• You can also use “Extra Bass” (p.80) in the “Setup” menu to enable/disable
Extra Bass.
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz
– High-definition streaming audio
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.74) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
DIRECT
VOL.
MUTE
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Enhancer On
VOL.
ENHANCER
“ENHANCER” lights up
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 48 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 49
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press z (power).
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode
and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press FM or AM to select a band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the
frequency currently selected is displayed.
2
Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations
automatically.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM
radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.75) in the “Option” menu.
Listening to FM/AM radio
z (power)
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TU••••FM50/AM9
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
P
RE
S
E
T
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
I
S
PLAY
ENTER
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
MODE
TUNING
FM
AM
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 49 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 50
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
■ Registering radio stations automatically
(Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to
40 stations).
• To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the
Auto Preset function.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”.
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again
to start the registration immediately.
• To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press
PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds
after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just
wait for 5 seconds).
• To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
■ Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.49)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Auto Preset
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
Preset number from which to start the registration
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Auto Preset
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Preset number
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
02:Empty
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
INFO
T
U
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RETURN
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
OPTION
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 50 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 51
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
■ Clearing preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and
press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station
to be cleared and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then
the next in-use preset number is displayed.
5
Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are
cleared.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Clear Preset
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Preset station to be cleared
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
STEREO
TUNED
01:Cleared
VOL.
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
T
U
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
2
3
4
1
ENTER
PRESET
FM
AM
OPTION
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 51 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 52
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.50).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Program Type
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Item name
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
CLASSICS
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Information
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TP FM101.30MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
Traffic information station (frequency)
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
TO
P
MEN
U
PO
P-
U
P
MEN
U
V
O
L
U
ME
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
MU
TE
DISPLAY
TRANSMI
T
R
E
C
EIVER
S
LEE
P
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RESE
T
TUNING
1
2
3
4
5
6
HDMI
AV
AUX
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
MOVI
E
MUSI
C
SUR. DE
C
ODE
S
TRAIGHT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
MO
D
E
S
ET
UP
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RETURN
INFO
OPTION
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 52 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 53
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
• You cannot play back iPod video on the unit.
• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.109).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours.
If “Network Standby” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
change without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly
operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.55).
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
Playing back iPod music
RADIO
STRAIGHT
AUDIO
AUX
5V 1A
The unit (front)
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Connected
VOL.
1/2
Music
Videos
iPod
Top
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
I
S
PLAY
ENTER
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
USBUSB
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 53 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 54
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to
the simple play mode (p.55).
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.56) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
iPod
Now Playing
5:10
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
1
4
5
2
3
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
iPod
Music
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/6
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
SCENE
T
OP
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
V
OLUM
E
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
R
ADI
O
MUTE
D
FM
MEM
O
RY
AM
PRE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
INF
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
T
RANSMI
T
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEEP
A
UX
US
B
5
6
NET
Z
O
NE
B
ZO
NE A
MO
VI
E
M
U
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
E
R
BA
SS
D
IRE
CT
MODE
SETU
P
O
PTION
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLA
Y
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 54 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 55
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.56) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding down).
j
1
2
iPod
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
5:10
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Operational remote control
keys
Function
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms the selection.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
External device
operation keys
a
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
d
s Stops playback.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (while holding
down).
j
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 55 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 56
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or
“Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE
B
ZO
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
S
ETU
P
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
OPTION
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 56 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 57
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit.
• For details on playable USB devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.109).
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
RADIO
STRAIGHT
AUDIO
AUX
5V 1A
The unit (front)
USB storage device
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Connected
VOL.
1/12
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
USB
Top
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2
3
4
5
6
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
I
S
PLAY
ENTER
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
USBUSB
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 57 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 58
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.59) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
USB
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/12
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
USB
Top
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 58 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 59
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.59) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or
“Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
1
2
USB
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
SCENE
T
OP
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
V
OLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
R
ADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
RY
AM
PRE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
INF
O
1
2 3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEEP
A
UX
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE
B
ZO
NE
A
MO
VI
E
M
U
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
CT
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 59 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 60
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.25). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information”
(p.91) in the “Setup” menu.
• (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.109).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
❑ For Windows Media Player 12
1
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.
5
Click “OK” to exit.
❑ For Windows Media Player 11
1
Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
2
Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
3
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.
4
Click “OK” to exit.
• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 60 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 61
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
1/4
DESKTOP
NAS A
NAS B
NOTE
SERVER
Top
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
SERVER
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
NET
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 61 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 62
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.63) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.63) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.92).
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/14
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
SERVER
NAS A
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
1
2
SERVER
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 62 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 63
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or
“Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
2
3
4
1
ENTER
OPTION
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 63 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 64
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.25). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
Playback of Internet radio
Follow the procedure below to select an Internet radio station and
start playback.
You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
Listening to Internet radio
1/7
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help
NET RADIO
Top
Station Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
NET RADIO
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
NET
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 64 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 65
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Playback indicator
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
• Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/7
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help
NET RADIO
Top
1
2
Station Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
NET RADIO
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 65 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 66
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)
You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the
“Bookmarks” folder.
■ Registering the station with the Option
menu
Follow the procedure below to register your favorite station to the
“Bookmarks” folder.
1
While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Bookmark On” and
press ENTER.
• On the playback screen, the current station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. On
the browse screen, the station selected in the list is added to the “Bookmarks”
folder.
• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the folder
and then “Bookmark Off”.
■ Registering the station on the vTuner
website
You can also register your favorite Internet radio stations on the
vTuner website.
1
Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.
2
Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID (MAC address of the unit) in
“Information” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu.
3
Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.
4
Register your favorite radio stations.
Click the “Add” icon (
❤
+) next to the station name.
• To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in
the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (
❤
–) next to the station
name.
You can switch the language.
Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
2
3
4
1
ENTER
OPTION
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 66 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music with AirPlay En 67
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes or iPod touch/iPhone/iPad music on
the unit via network.”
• This section describes "iPod touch", "iPhone" and "iPad" as the "iPod". "iPod" refers to "iPod touch",
"iPhone" and "iPad", unless otherwise specified.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.25). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to
connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.109).
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
Playing back music with AirPlay
PC
iTunes
Router
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 can be connected
wirelessly to a network.)
iPod
The unit
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 67 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music with AirPlay En 68
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.75) in the “Option”
menu to “Off”.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in
advance.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
2
1
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
AirPlay
Now Playing
5:30
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
iTunes (example of English version)
Check this box
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
D
I
S
PLA
Y
ENTER
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
ET
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
External device
operation keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 68 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 69
The Zone A/B function allows you to play back an input source in the room where the
unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B).
For example, you can turn on Zone A (turn off Zone B) when you are in the living room,
and turn on Zone B (turn off Zone A) when you are in the study room. Also, you can turn
on both zones when you want to enjoy the same input source in those rooms
simultaneously.
• Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the zone B.
• The same input source is applied to both Zone A and Zone B.
• By default, the volume for Zone B changes in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. If there is volume
difference between Zone A/B, you can correct it in “ZoneB Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.70). Also, you can
adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.70).
• You can automatically enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B in conjunction with a scene selection
(p.43)
Preparing Zone B
Connect the device that will be used in Zone B to the unit.
Connect the speakers placed in Zone B to the unit with speaker cables.
To utilize the SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks for Zone B speakers, set
“Power Amp Assign” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone B” after connecting the power
cable to an AC wall outlet.
Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Living room (Zone A)
Study room (Zone B)
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
12
12
39
45
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
The unit (rear)
Zone A
Zone B
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 69 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 70
■ Basic playback procedure
1
Press ZONE A or ZONE B to enable/disable audio
output to Zone A or Zone B.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
■ Correcting volume difference between
Zone A and Zone B
If you are bothered by volume difference between Zone A/B, follow
the procedure below to adjust the volume for Zone B.
1
Press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Volume Trim”
(Volume Trim) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ZoneB Trim”
(ZB.Trim) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the
setting.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
• This setting is not effective when “ZoneB Volume” (p.87) in the “Setup”
menu is set to “Async.”.
■ Adjusting the volume for Zone B
separately
You can separately adjust the volume for Zone B using the remote
control when “ZoneB Volume” (p.87) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“Async.”.
1
To set the remote control to the Zone B operation
mode, while holding down the cursor key (r), hold
down SCENE (TV) for more than 3 seconds.
TRANSMIT blinks twice.
2
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume for Zone B.
• To mute the audio output to Zone B, press MUTE.
3
To set the remote control to the Zone A operation
mode, while holding down the cursor key (r), hold
down SCENE (BD/DVD) for more than 3 seconds.
TRANSMIT blinks twice.
1 2
PARTY
VIRTUAL
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
23
ZONE
A
ZONE
B
VOL.
HDMI1
“ZONE A” and/or “ZONE B” lights up
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
FM
INFO
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
SCENE
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
NET
RADI
O
DISPLAY
R
ECEIVER
S
LEE
P
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
ENTER
RETURN
VOLUME
SCENE (BD/DVD)
SCENE (TV)
MUTE
OPTION
TRANSMIT
ZONE A
ZONE B
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 70 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 71
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Viewing the current status
Input source group Item
HDMI 1–6
AV 1–6
AUX
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
TUNER
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.52).
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Audio Decoder
VOL.
Item name
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
†‡Pro Logic
VOL.
Information
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
1
2 3
4
5
6
FM
MEM
O
RY
AM
PRE
S
E
T
TU
NIN
G
SCENE
RETURN
T
OP
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
V
OLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
R
ADI
O
MUTE
DI
S
PLA
Y
ENTER
TRANSMI
T
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEEP
A
UX
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE
B
ZO
NE
A
MO
VI
E
M
U
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
ENHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
CT
M
OD
E
S
ETU
P
O
PTION
2
3
4
1
INFO
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 71 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 72
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Default settings are underlined.
• Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available.
For details, refer to each manual on the supplied CD-ROM.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Tone Control
VOL.
Tone Control
DSP/Surround
Volume Trim
Lipsync
Signal Info
Audio In
Option
Item Function Page
Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
73
DSP/Surround
(DSP/Surround)
DSP Level
(DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level. 73
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
73
Extended
Surround
(EXTD)
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources
when surround back speakers are used.
73
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 74
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 74
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 74
ZoneB Trim
(ZB.Trim)
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Corrects volume differences between Zone A/B.
70
Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup”
menu.
74
Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. 74
Audio In (Audio In)
Combines the video jack of the selected input source
with an audio jack of others.
75
Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. 75
Auto Preset (Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets.
50
Clear Preset (Clear Preset) Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. 51
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 72 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 73
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass)
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
• You can also adjust the tone with the front panel controls. Press TONE CONTROL to select "Treble" or
"Bass", then press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround)
Configures the sound field program and surround settings.
❑ DSP Level (DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Setting range
-6 dB to 0 dB
to +3 dB
❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
❑ Extended Surround (EXTD)
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
Settings
Traffic Program (TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
52
Repeat (Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.56),
USB storage device (p.59), or media server (p.63).
—
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.56),
USB storage device (p.59), or media server (p.63).
—
Volume Interlock (Interlock)
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod
via AirPlay.
75
Bookmark On (Bookmark On)
Bookmark Off (Bookmark Off)
Adds your favorite Internet radio station to the
"Bookmarks" folder, or removes it from the
"Bookmarks" folder.
66
Item Function Page
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Off (Off)
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
Auto (Auto)
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.
bPLIIx Movie
(bPLIIxMo)
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLIIxMu)
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
EX/ES (EX/ES)
Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
Off (Off)
Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit
reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 73 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 74
• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround
back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing
back those sources.
❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.48).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.48).
Settings
Default
TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
■ Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.86) in the “Setup” menu.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
Default
AirPlay: Off (Off)
Others: On (On)
■ Signal Info (Signal Info)
Displays information about the video/audio signal.
Choices
• To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly.
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
On (On) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal
Channel (CHAN)
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels,
and LFE.
Sampling (SAMPL) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate (B RATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Video In (V IN) Type and resolution of the input digital signal
Video Out (V OUT) Type and resolution of the output digital signal
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 74 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 75
■ Audio In (Audio In)
Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–6 or AV 1–6) with an
audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio
output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo
jacks (such as game consoles)
Input sources
HDMI 1–6, AV 1–6
■ Setup procedure
(To input audio through a digital optical jack)
Select “AV 1” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a
digital optical cable.
(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)
Select “AV 2” or “AV 3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital coaxial cable.
(To input audio through analog audio jacks)
Select “AV 4”, “AV 5”, or “AV 6”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding
audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.
■ Video Out (Video Out)
Selects a video to be output with the selected audio source. For example, you can
watching the video while listening to the radio.
Input sources
TUNER, USB, (network sources), AUX
Settings
■ Volume Interlock (Interlock)
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Settings
Off (Off)
Does not output video.
HDMI 1–6, AV 1–6 Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited (Ltd)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).
Full (Full)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 75 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 76
CONFIGURATIONS
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry
out operations while viewing the front display.
• If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen (p.97).
1
Press SETUP.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 76 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 77
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Configuration
Power Amp Assign
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Selects a speaker system.
79
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 79
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 79
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 79
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 80
Surround Back
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
80
Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 80
Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 80
Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. 80
Virtual CINEMA FRONT Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. 81
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 81
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 81
Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 81
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 82
HDMI Configuration
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 83
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 83
Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 83
TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 83
Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 83
ARC Enables/disables ARC. 84
SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 84
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 77 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 78
Sound
DSP Parameter
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 85
Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 85
Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 85
Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 85
Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 85
Lipsync
Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 86
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 86
Volum e
Scale Switches the scale of the volume display. 86
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 86
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 86
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 86
ZoneB Volume
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A.
87
ECO
Auto Power Standby Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 88
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 88
Function
Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 89
Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 89
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 89
DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 90
Network
Information Displays the network information on the unit. 91
Network Connection
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Selects the network connection method.
91
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 91
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 92
DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 92
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 92
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 92
Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. 93
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 93
Menu Item Function Page
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 78 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 79
Speaker
Configures the speaker settings manually.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Selects a speaker system.
In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker
configurations are possible using the Zone B speakers or bi-amp connection.
Settings
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.
Settings
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Power Amp Assign
Basic
Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Zone B speakers or a bi-amp connection).
BI-AMP
Select this option when you connect front speakers that support
bi-amp connections (p.17).
Zone B
Select this option when you use Zone B speakers (p.69) in addition to
the speaker system in the main zone (Zone A).
Subwoofer
Use
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.
The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel
audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Front
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Center
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 79 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 80
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
• “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone
B”, or when “Surround” is set to “None”.
• "Surround Back" is not available when "Virtual CINEMA FRONT" is set to "On".
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a
speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified
value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz
, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear,
switch the subwoofer phase.
Settings
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.
Settings
• You can also use BASS on the remote control to enable/disable Extra Bass (p.48).
Surround
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
Surround Back
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Small x2
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce
surround back channel audio.
Crossover
Subwoofer Phase
Normal Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.
Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.
Extra Bass
Off Disables Extra Bass.
On Enables Extra Bass.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 80 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 81
Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
configuration.
Settings
• Select "On" only when utilizing the Virtual CINEMA FRONT configuration (p.13).
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only),
Surround Back R (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only), Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft)
Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only),
Surround Back R (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only), Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB
Others: -1.0 dB
■ Equalizer
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Selects the type of equalizer to be used.
Settings
• “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.38).
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select the desired speaker channel.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the
cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Off Disables the front 5-channel speaker configuration.
On Enables the front 5-channel speaker configuration.
EQ Select
PEQ
Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO
measurement (p.38).
GEQ
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Off Does not use the equalizer.
Equalizer
EQ Select
GEQ Edit
Channel
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
2.5kHz
6.3kHz
16kHz
GEQ
Front L
Back:RETURN
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 81 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 82
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Off
Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 82 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 83
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Configuration
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.111).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.111) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
Selects a device to output audio.
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
HDMI OUT (TV)
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when
the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input
selection keys (HDMI 1–6) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in
standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AV 1–6
Default
AV 4
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
HDMI Control
Off Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”,
and “SCENE”.
Audio Output
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On
Enables the audio output from the speakers.
Off
Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Standby Through
Off
(When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
Auto
(When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”)
Automatically selects whether to output videos/audio depending on
the status of the connected device.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
TV Audio Input
Standby Sync
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 83 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 84
Enables/disables ARC (p.21) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices
connected to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene
selection.
• TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device
• Playback device: starting playback
Choices (SCENE keys)
BD/DVD, TV, NET, RADIO
Settings
Default
BD/DVD, TV: On
NET, RADIO: Off
• SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We
recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
ARC
Off Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
SCENE
Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 84 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 85
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ DSP Parameter
Configures the surround decoder settings.
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.45). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA
DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
7ch/5ch Stereo).
Settings
Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function
is enabled, you can wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and
generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This
setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5067/TSR-5770
only) is selected.
Settings
Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective
when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) is selected.
Setting range
0 to 3
to 7
Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher
to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound
field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music”
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) is selected.
Setting range
-3 to 0
to +3
Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field.
Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower
to weaken (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is
selected.
Setting range
0.0 to 0.3
to 1.0
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Panorama
Off Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
Center Width
Dimension
Center Image
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 85 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 86
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
• You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.74) in the “Option” menu.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to
“Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to
“Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms
to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
■ Volume
Configures the volume settings.
Switches the scale of the volume display.
Settings
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital
and DTS signals) playback.
Settings
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
[50.0 to 95.0 (5.0 increments), 97.0]
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Select
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Adjustment
Scale
dB Displays the volume in the “dB” unit.
0-97 Displays the volume in the numeric value (0.5 to 97.0).
Dynamic Range
Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Min/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.
-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
(0.5 dB increments)
[0.5 to 97.0
(0.5 increments)]
Sets the level to the specified volume level.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 86 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 87
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for
Zone A.
Settings
• If “ZoneB Volume” is set to “Async.”, the volume for Zone B is temporarily set to -40 dB. As necessary,
adjust the volume using the remote control (p.70).
ZoneB Volume
Sync.
Adjusts the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for
Zone A.
Async.
Does not adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume
for Zone A. Adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.70).
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 87 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 88
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Auto Power Standby
Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 20 minutes
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in
the front display.
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
• Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the
unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit
and the unit has not detected any input signal for the specified time.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time.
Off
Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 88 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 89
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.
Input sources
HDMI 1–6, AV 1–6, USB, AUX
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed and press
ENTER.
• To select a name from the presets, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source and the
cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a character.
3
To confirm the new name, press ENTER.
• To cancel the entry, press RETURN.
4
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Dimmer
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0
(higher to brighten)
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.88) is set to “On”.
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Input Rename
Blu-ray
HDMI1
OK:ENTER
CANCEL:RETURN
Off Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
o
Memory Guard
Memory Guard On
Back:RETURN
Icon
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 89 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 90
■ DC OUT
Configures the DC OUT jack setting.
Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC
OUT jack.
Settings
Power Mode
Continuous
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of
the power state (on/standby) of the unit.
Power Sync.
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the unit is turned
on.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 90 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 91
Network
Configures the network settings.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Information
Displays the network information on the unit.
* HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only
■ Network Connection
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Selects the network connection method.
Choices
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack
Connection * Connection method
SSID * The access point to which the unit is connected
Security * The encryption method for your network
MAC Address MAC address
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner)
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with
a commercially-available network cable.
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.30).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the
unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device
to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.36).
DHCP
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 91 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 92
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
• Operation of the AirPlay function (p.67) or the DMC is not limited by this setting.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10).
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a character.
3
To confirm the new name, press ENTER.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Filter
Off Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
MAC Address 1–10
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Off Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Network Name
Yamaha xxxxxx
Back:RETURN
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 92 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 93
■ Network Update
Updates the firmware via the network.
Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the
unit’s firmware” (p.97).
Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.
Displays the system ID number.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
• Default settings are underlined.
Settings
• Japanese and Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Perform Update
Firmware Version
System ID
English English
日本語
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Chinese
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 93 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 94
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
z (power).
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
• Default settings are underlined.
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
z (power)
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
Item Function Page
SP IMP.
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
94
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 95
TU
(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
95
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 95
INIT Restores the default settings. 95
UPDATE Updates the firmware. 96
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 96
6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit.
8
Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
SP IMP.••8¬MIN
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 94 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 95
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1
, ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (BD/DVD)
for more than 3 seconds.
To select ID2, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (TV) for
more than 3 seconds.
• Once the remote control ID is selected successfully, TRANSMIT indicator blinks twice. If it blinks six times,
selecting has failed.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it
is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images
on the TV screen do not appear correctly.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
REMOTE ID••ID1
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TU••••FM50/AM9
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TV FORMAT•NTSC
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
INIT••••CANCEL
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 95 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 96
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is
connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,
refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the envelope icon (p) will appear in the screen. In this
case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware”
(p.97).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.93) in the “Setup” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
UPDATE•••••USB
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
VERSION••xx.xx
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 96 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 97
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.96).
1
Press SETUP.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press
ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Network Update” and
press ENTER.
If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears
in the screen.
• To cancel the operation without updating the firmware, press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Perform Update” and
press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update
starts.
5
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press z (power) on the
front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the
wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the
condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using
the USB memory device (p.96).
• To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via
HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.96).
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
p
Update:ENTER
Network Update
Perform Update
Firmware Version
System ID
x.xx
xxxxxxxx
Back:RETURN
Icon
1234
5 6
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
SCENE
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
SLEEP
AUX USB
5 6
NET
ZONE B
ZONE A
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
BASS DIRECT
MODE
SETUP
OPTION
2341
S
CEN
E
RETURN
TO
P
MENU
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
VOLUME
B
D
DVD
TV
NET
RADI
O
MUTE
DISPLAY
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
P
RE
S
E
T
T
U
NIN
G
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRANSMI
T
R
ECEIVER
HDMI
AV
S
LEE
P
AU
X
USB
5
6
NET
ZO
NE B
Z
O
NE
A
M
O
VI
E
MU
S
I
C
S
UR. DE
CO
DE
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
ER
B
A
SS
DIRE
C
T
M
OD
E
OPTIO
N
2
3
4
1
ENTER
SETUP
Cursor keys
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 97 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 98
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize
the speaker settings again (p.38). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually,
use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.79).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.86).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.86).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.74).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.111). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to display a device name or a manufacture name on the
front display when selecting an input source...
By default, input source names (such as “HDMI 1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the
front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like,
use “Input Rename” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the
presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”).
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.89).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.95).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode…
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.83) in the “Setup” menu
to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when
this function is enabled.
Frequently asked questions
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 98 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 99
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator
on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the
AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.17).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.88).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.94).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.17).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the
AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 99 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 100
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.4).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.95).
The remote control is set to the Zone B operation mode. Set the remote control to the Zone A operation mode (p.70).
Problem Cause Remedy
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 100 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 101
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.74).
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled.
Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.86).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
(This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)
Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.74).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.82).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform YPAO (p.38) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.79).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform YPAO (p.38) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.81).
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled.
Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.
The extended surround is disabled.
Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.73).
“Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone B”.
When “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone B”,
you cannot use the surround back speakers. To use the surround back speakers,
set “Power Amp Assign” to “Basic” (p.79).
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.80).
Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.38) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.79).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 101 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 102
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.83).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.19).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.83).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.84). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.74). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.88).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Problem Cause Remedy
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 102 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 103
Video
FM/AM radio
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about
video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal
Info” in the “Option” menu (p.74). For information about video signals supported
by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.113).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.19 to 21).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.49).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.49).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.49).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.50).
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 103 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 104
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.91). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.91).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.60).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.92).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.60).
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The application for smartphone/tablet "AV
CONTROLLER" does not detect the unit.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.92).
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.96).
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 104 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 105
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Wireless network is not found.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
Problem Cause Remedy
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 105 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 106
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.60).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.53).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.25).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
DC Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the AV accessory connected to
the DC OUT jack.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your AV accessory.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Not available
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
Internet radio has been selected as the input source when using
Wireless Direct.
You cannot use Internet radio when using Wireless Direct. To listen to Internet radio, connect the unit to
a router.
The DHCP server is not found. Make sure the DHCP server function on your router is enabled.
Not connected
The network cable is not connected. Connect the network cable properly.
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)
The wireless router (access point) is not found.
Make sure the wireless router (access point) is turned on.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.95).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.60). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 106 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 107
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Glossary
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 107 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 108
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
Network information
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 108 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats En 109
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
■ Supported devices
❑ USB devices
• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.
❑ iPod
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
❑ AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of January 2014)
Supported devices and file formats
Made for.
iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod classic
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
(as of January 2014)
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 109 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Video signal flow En 110
■ File formats
❑ USB
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC,
FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
❑ PC/NAS
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC,
FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of
FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below.
About HTC Connect
This receiver features “HTC Connect”, a simple way to enjoy all music content from
your HTC Connect certified smartphone.
1. HTC Connect music streaming provided on this product has been developed based on
interoperability testing as defined by the HTC Connect program with the HTC Connect
compatible smartphones.
2. HTC Connect has been tested with MP3 and AAC encoding formats. Other formats may
not be compatible.
3. High network congestion may interfere with the operation of HTC Connect.
4. Music navigation via the music progress bar is not currently supported with HTC
Connect.
Please check HTC website for up to date information about features, compatible
devices and audio format support: http://www.htc-connect.com/certified-devices
Video signal flow
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEOVIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT VIDEO
in
VIDEO in
COMPONENT VIDEO
out
VIDEO out
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 110 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 111
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.43)
• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations)
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press SETUP.
c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.
d Press ENTER again.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select “On” as shown below.
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
VOLUME
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
DISPLAY
ENTER
SETUP
OPTION
RETURN
TO
P
M
EN
U
PO
P-UP
M
EN
U
VO
LUM
E
BD
D
VD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUT
E
DISPLAY
O
PTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
SETUP
Cursor keys
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Configuration
HDMI Control
Audio Output
Standby Through
TV Audio Input
Standby Sync
ARC
SCENE
On
Auto
Auto
AV4
Auto
On
Back: RETURN
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 111 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 112
f If you made a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit, use the
cursor keys (q/w) to select "TV Audio Input" and the cursor keys (e/r) to select
"AV 1".
g Press SETUP.
3
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
5
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
6
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
7
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
– “ARC” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the
instruction manual for the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital
optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.19).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks,
use “TV Audio Input” (p.83) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function (p.43), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 112 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 113
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 113 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 114
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
Reference diagram (rear panel)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
TV
)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
NETWORK
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SPEAKERS
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
RADIO
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
1
HDMI 5
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
HDMI 6
(
NET
)
(HTR-5067/TSR-5770 U.S.A. model)
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 114 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 115
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby,
Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
(For HTR-4067)
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195;
7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
(For HTR-5067/TSR-5770)
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195;
7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of
DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
"Made for iPod" and "Made for iPhone" mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod
touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS
and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect Logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of HTC Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Trademarks
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 115 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 116
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 4 (AV 4–6, AUX [Mini Jack])
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 1 (AV 1)
Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3)
•Video
Composite x 4 (AV 3–6)
Component x 2 (AV 1–2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–6)
• Other jacks
[HTR-5067/TSR-5770]
- USB x 1 (USB2.0)
- NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
- NETWORK (Wireless) x 1 (IEEE802.11b/IEEE802.11g)
[HTR-4067]
- USB x 1 (USB2.0)
- NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
[HTR-5067/TSR-5770]
- Speaker Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R*)
* Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE B]
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2, mono)
- AV OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1 (PHONES)
[HTR-4067]
- Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R)
- Subwoofer Out x 1 (SUBWOOFER PRE OUT)
- AV OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1 (PHONES)
•Video
Composite x 2 (MONITOR OUT, AV OUT)
Component x 1 (MONITOR OUT)
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 1
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• DC OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI Features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
Wireless Network [HTR-5067/TSR-5770]
• Wireless LAN Standards
IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g
• Radio Frequency Band
2.4 GHz
• WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
Push-Button-Method, PIN Method
• Wireless Direct
Direct connection with mobile devices
• Security Type
WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES),
Mixed Mode
Specifications
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 116 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 117
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital EX [HTR-5067/TSR-5770]
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
• Post Decoding Format
[HTR-5067/TSR-5770]
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby
Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
[HTR-4067]
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby
Pro Logic II Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8
Ω
)
[Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................80 W+80 W
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................95 W+95 W
Center ............................................................................... 95 W
Surround L/R...........................................................95 W+95 W
Surround Back L/R [HTR-5067/TSR-5770]............ 95 W+95 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
[Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R.....................................................................115 W/ch
Center ........................................................................115 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................115 W/ch
Surround Back L/R [HTR-5067/TSR-5770].................115 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (
JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6
Ω
)
[China, Korea, Asia, Taiwan and General models]
Front L/R.....................................................................135 W/ch
Center.........................................................................135 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch
Surround Back L/R [HTR-5067/TSR-5770].................135 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
HTR-4067:
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)................................110/130/160/180 W
HTR-5067/TSR-5770:
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)................................120/140/170/190 W
[Other models]
HTR-4067:
Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω)..........................................110/130/160 W
HTR-5067/TSR-5770:
Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω)..........................................120/140/170 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω............................. 120 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
AV 4 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω).............................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
AV 4 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV 4 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω).............................100 mV/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV 4 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ..........................+0/-3 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV 4 etc. (DIRECT)
(Input 1
kΩ
Shorted, Speaker Out)
......................................................................... 110 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
AV 4 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
.................................................................70 dB/50 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range..............................................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step.................................................................................0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics
Bass Boost/Cut .............................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover ................................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut.......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround).................................12 dB/oct.
H.P.F. (Surround Back [HTR-5067/TSR-5770])..........12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 117 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 118
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Taiwan and General models]... NTSC
[Other models].................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response
Component ............................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia, Taiwan and General models]
.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono................................................................................ 71 dB
Stereo .............................................................................. 70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono................................................................................. 0.5%
Stereo ............................................................................... 0.6%
• Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia, Taiwan and General models]
................................................. 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Taiwan and General model]
.......................................AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption ........................................................260 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off .............. 0.1 W or less
HDMI Control On, Standby Through Auto (No Signals)
.......................................................................0.3 W (Minimum)
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)
.......................................................................... 1.0 W (Typical)
[HTR-5067/TSR-5770]
Network Standby On
Wired ............................................................... 2.3W (Typical)
Wi-Fi ................................................................ 2.8W (Typical)
Wireless Direct ................................................ 3.1W (Typical)
HDMI Control On, StandbyThrough On (No Signals), Network
Standby On ........................................................ 3.3W (Typical)
[HTR-4067]
Network Standby On .......................................... 2.3W (Typical)
HDMI Control On, StandbyThrough On (No Signals), Network
Standby On ........................................................ 2.5W (Typical)
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia, Taiwan and General models] ................................600 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
..................... 435 x 161 x 315 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 12-3/8”)
• Reference Dimensions (with attaching wireless antenna)
[HTR-5067/TSR-5770]
..................... 435 x 221 x 327 mm (17-1/8” x 8-3/4” x 12-7/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
•Weight
[HTR-5067/TSR-5770]..................................... 8.1 kg (17.9 lbs)
[HTR-4067]...................................................... 8.0 kg (17.6 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 118 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 119
Symbols
Envelope icon (p) 97
Lock icon (o) 89
Numerics
2.1-channel system 14
2ch Stereo (sound program) 46
3.1-channel system 14
4.1-channel system 14
4K Ultra HD 113
5.1-channel system 13
, 16
5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) 13
5ch Stereo (sound program) 46
6.1-channel system 13
7.1-channel system 13
, 16
7ch Stereo (sound program) 46
A
A.DRC (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 73
Access denied (error indication) 106
Access error (error indication) 106
Access Point Scan (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 33
Action Game (sound program) 45
Adaptive DRC (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 73
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 86
ADVANCED SETUP menu 94
Adventure (sound program) 45
AirPlay 67
AM radio listening 49
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 83
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 112
ARC (HDMI, Setup menu) 84
Audio Decoder (front display information) 71
Audio file format (PC/NAS) 110
Audio file format (USB storage device) 110
Audio In (Option menu) 75
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 83
Audio Return Channel (ARC) 112
Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 88
Auto Preset (FM radio, Option menu) 50
Automatic speaker setting optimization 38
Automatic station preset (FM radio) 50
AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 88
B
B RATE (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
Banana plug 17
Basic playback operation 42
BASS (sound mode) 48
Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 73
BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 79
Bitrate (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
Bitstream 113
Bookmark Off (Internet radio, Option menu) 66
Bookmark On (Internet radio, Option menu) 66
C
Cellar Club (sound program) 46
Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 79
Center Image (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85
Center Width (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85
Chamber (sound program) 46
CHAN (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
Channel (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
Check SP Wires (error indication) 106
Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 40
CINEMA DSP 45
CINEMA DSP 3D 45
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85
Clear Preset (FM/AM radio, Option menu) 51
Clock Time (Radio Data System) 52
Compressed Music Enhancer 48
Configuration (HDMI, Setup menu) 83
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 79
Connection (Information, Setup menu) 91
Crossover (Speaker, Setup menu) 80
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 38
D
DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 90
DC Overloaded (error indication) 106
Decoder Off (front display information) 71
Default Gateway (Information, Setup menu) 91
Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 91
Default setting restoration 95
DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 91
Digital Media Controller (DMC) 92
Dimension (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85
Dimmer (Function, Setup menu) 89
DIRECT (sound mode) 48
Direct playback 48
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 107
Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 81
DLNA 60
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 92
DMC Control (Network, Setup menu) 92
DNS Server (Information, Setup menu) 91
DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 91
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 73
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 47
Dolby Pro Logic II (surround decoder) 47
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (surround decoder) 47
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 73
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 73
Drama (sound program) 45
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 107
DSP Level (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 73
DSP Parameter (Sound, Setup menu) 85
DSP Program (front display information) 71
DSP/Surround (Option menu) 73
DTS Neo:6 (surround decoder) 47
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 73
Dynamic Range (Volume, Setup menu) 86
Index
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 119 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 120
E
ECO (Setup menu) 88
ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 88
Enhancer (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 74
ENHANCER (sound mode) 48
EQ Select (Equalizer, Setup menu) 81
Equalizer (Speaker, Setup menu) 81
Error indication (front display) 106
EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 73
EXTD (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 73
Extended Surround (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 73
Extra Bass 48
Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 80
F
Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 92
Firmware update 96
Firmware update (network) 96
Firmware update (USB) 96
Firmware Version (Network Update, Setup menu) 93
Firmware version check 96
FM radio listening 49
FM/AM radio tuning 49
FORMAT (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
Format (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
Frequency (FM/AM radio) 49
Frequency step setting 49
, 95
Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 79
Front display (part names and functions) 8
Front display brightness 89
Front display information 71
Front panel (part names and functions) 7
Function (Setup menu) 89
G
GEQ (Equalizer, Setup menu) 81
H
Hall in Munich (sound program) 46
Hall in Vienna (sound program) 46
HDMI (Setup menu) 83
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 83
HDMI OUT (TV) (Audio Output, Setup menu) 83
HDMI signal compatibility 113
Headphones 46
High definition audio 113
HTC Connect 110
I
In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 74
Indicator (part names and functions) 8
Information (Network, Setup menu) 91
Information display (front display) 8
Information switching (front display) 71
INIT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95
Initial Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 86
Input (front display information) 71
Input Rename (Function, Setup menu) 89
Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 74
Interlock (Option menu) 75
Internal Err. (YPAO error message) 40
Internal Error (error indication) 106
Internet radio listening 64
IP Address (Information, Setup menu) 91
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 91
iPod charge 53
iPod content playback 53
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 67
iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 67
L
Language (Setup menu) 93
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 81
Level Error (YPAO warning message) 41
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 108
Lipsync 108
Lipsync (Option menu) 74
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 86
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 108
M
MAC Address (Information, Setup menu) 91
MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 92
MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 92
Manual Setting (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 34
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 50
Max Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 86
Media sharing setup 60
Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 89
Menu language selection 27
Monaural reception (FM radio) 49
Mono Movie (sound program) 45
MOVIE (sound program category) 45
Multiple room playback 69
MUSIC (sound program category) 46
Music Video (sound program) 46
Muting 42
N
NAS (Network Attached Storage) 25, 60
NAS content playback 61
Network (Setup menu) 91
Network Attached Storage (NAS) 25
, 60
Network Connection (Network, Setup menu) 91
Network information 91
Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 92
Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 92
Network Update (Network, Setup menu) 93
No content (error indication) 106
No device (error indication) 106
No Front SP (YPAO error message) 40
No MIC (YPAO error message) 40
No Signal (YPAO error message) 40
No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 40
Noisy (YPAO error message) 40
Not available (error indication) 106
Not connected (error indication) 106
NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95
O
Option menu 72
Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 41
Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 41
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 120 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 121
P
PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95
Panorama (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85
PC content playback 61
PEQ (Equalizer, Setup menu) 81
Perform Update (Network Update, Setup menu) 93
PIN Code (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 33
Please wait (error indication) 106
Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 79
Power management 88
Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 90
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 51
Program Service (Radio Data System) 52
Program Type (Radio Data System) 52
R
Radio Data System information 52
Radio Data System tuning 52
Radio Text (Radio Data System) 52
Rear panel (part names and functions) 9
RemID Mismatch (error indication) 106
Remote control (part names and functions) 10
Remote control ID setting 95
REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95
Rename (input name) 89
Rename (network name) 92
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 56
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 63
Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 59
Roleplaying Game (sound program) 45
S
SAMPL (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
Sampling (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 40
Scale (Volume, Setup menu) 86
SCENE (HDMI, Setup menu) 84
Scene configuration 43
SCENE function 43
SCENE link playback 43
Sci-Fi (sound program) 45
Security (Information, Setup menu) 91
Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 86
Setup menu 76
Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup
menu) 30
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 56
Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 63
Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 59
Signal Info (Option menu) 74
Signal information 74
SILENT CINEMA 46
Simple play (iPod) 55
Sleep timer 10
Sound (Setup menu) 85
Sound field effect 45
Sound mode selection 44
Sound program 45
SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94
Speaker (Setup menu) 79
Speaker impedance 12
Speaker impedance setting 15
, 94
Speaker placement 12
Spectacle (sound program) 45
Sports (sound program) 45
SSID 108
SSID (Information, Setup menu) 91
Standard (sound program) 45
Standby Sync (HDMI, Setup menu) 83
Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 83
Station preset (FM/AM radio) 50
Status (Information, Setup menu) 91
Stereo reception (FM radio) 49
STRAIGHT (sound mode) 47
Straight decode 47
Subnet Mask (Information, Setup menu) 91
Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 91
Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 79
Subwoofer Phase (Speaker, Setup menu) 80
Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 74
SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 47
Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 80
Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 80
Surround decoder 47
SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 74
System ID (Network Update, Setup menu) 93
T
Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 82
The Bottom Line (sound program) 46
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 46
Tone Control (Option menu) 73
TP (Traffic Program) 52
Traffic information (Radio Data System) 52
Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 52
Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 73
TU (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95
TV Audio Input (HDMI, Setup menu) 83
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95
U
Unable to play (error indication) 106
UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 96
USB Overloaded (error indication) 106
USB storage device content playback 57
User Cancel (YPAO error message) 40
V
V IN (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
V OUT (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 96
Version error (error indication) 106
Video In (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
Video Out (Option menu) 75
Video Out (Signal Info, Option menu) 74
Video signal flow 110
Video signal type setting 95
Video/audio input jack combination 22
Virtual CINEMA DSP 46
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 46
Virtual CINEMA FRONT (Speaker, Setup menu) 81
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 121 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 122
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 6
Voltage selection 26
Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 86
Volume Interlock (Option menu) 75
Volume Trim (Option menu) 74
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 6
vTuner ID (Information, Setup menu) 91
W
Wi-Fi 108
Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) 91
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
(Network Connection, Setup menu) 30
, 91
Wireless Direct
(Network Connection, Setup menu) 36
, 91
WPS 108
WPS Button (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 32
WPS button configuration 31
Y
Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer
(YPAO) 38
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 38
YPAO error message 40
YPAO microphone 38
YPAO warning message 41
Z
ZB.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 70
Zone B 69
Zone B (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 79
Zone B operation 70
Zone B preparation 69
Zone B volume adjustment 70
ZoneB Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 70
ZoneB Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 87
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 122 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
© 2014 Yamaha Corporation YG067A0/EN
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 123 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM
Documenttranscriptie
00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 1 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 2 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 FEATURES 5 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PREPARATIONS 10 Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Attaching the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 38 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 11 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 PLAYBACK 42 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch 5.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 7.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting Zone B speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting to the jack on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 6 Connecting to a network (wired LAN connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 7 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 En 2 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 3 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Preparing Zone B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 APPENDIX 98 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 CONFIGURATIONS Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 76 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . 94 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 En 3 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 4 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round. AM antenna FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. YPAO microphone Wireless antenna (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) • The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the HTR-5067/TSR-5770 (U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified. • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) • This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless otherwise specified. Easy Setup Guide • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. Safety Brochure • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Accessories En 4 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 5 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • iPod/iPhone . p.53 • USB . p.57 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.60 • Internet radio . p.64 • AirPlay . p.67 Supports 2- to 5.1-channel (to 7.1-channel*) speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.38 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) * * . p.45 • Enjoying compressed music with . p.48 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) • Playing back music in multiple rooms . p.69 (Zone B)* Network contents * HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only Speakers Audio iPod/iPhone Audio HDMI Control USB device 3D and 4K Ultra HD signals supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video TV AV receiver (the unit) Wireless connection to a network* . p.25 * HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.43 Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) TV remote control . p.111 FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 5 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 6 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.21) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.45) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, portable audio player, and other devices. The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you to create a 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.22). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.86). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... BD/DVD player Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.83). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. Set-top box Game console I want to change the on-screen menu language... Portable audio player Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.27). TV ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.19) When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. HDMI Control TV audio Video from external device ❑ Easy operation and wireless music playback from iPhone or Android™ device ❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.46) You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in front. ❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.48) When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry, which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. ❑ Low power consumption I want to update the firmware... Use “Network Update” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu or “UPDATE” (p.96) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware. Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. • SCENE settings (p.43) • Sound/video settings and signal information for each source (p.72) • Various function settings (p.77) • System settings (p.94) The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption and helps to create an eco-friendly home theater system (p.88). By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit our website for details. FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 7 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : A YPAO MIC DIRECT INFO (WPS) MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TV TONE CONTROL NET PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA B 1 z (power) key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.83) • Standby Through is enabled (p.83) • Network Standby is enabled (p.92) • An iPod is being charged (p.53) 3 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.38). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.4). 5 INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.71). (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Enters the wireless LAN connection setup (WPS button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.30). AUX AUDIO C D E F G H 5V I 6 MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.50). 7 PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.51). 8 FM and AM keys Switch between FM and AM (p.49). 9 TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.49). 0 Front display Displays information (p.8). A DIRECT key Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.48). B PHONES jack For connecting headphones. C INPUT keys Select an input source. 1A J D TONE CONTROL key Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.73). E SCENE keys Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.43). F PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.44). G STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.47). H AUX jack For connecting devices, such as portable audio players (p.24). I USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.57) or an iPod (p.53). J VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 7 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 8 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Front display (indicators) 1 2 ECO 8 9 4 5 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT 1 2 3 6 PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE ZONE 2 A 3 B VOL. SP IMP.••8 MIN 1 HDMI Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. OUT Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. 2 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.48) is working. 3 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.45) or CINEMA DSP 3D (p.45) is working. 4 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. 5 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 0 A 6 MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. 7 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. 8 ECO Lights up when the eco mode (p.88) is enabled. 9 Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. 0 Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.71). A Signal strength indicator (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) 7 B ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 9 C D C Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L)* J Surround back speaker (R)* K Surround back speaker* L Subwoofer * HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only D ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.73) is working. Indicates the strength of the wireless signal (p.28). B ZONE indicators (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Indicate the zone to which the sound is output (p.70). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 9 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Rear panel 1 3 2 4 5 6 (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 U.S.A. model) WIRELESS HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 NETWORK (NET) ARC ANTENNA AM (RADIO) FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB SPEAKERS DC OUT 5V 0.5A FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 7 AV OUT 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 8 9 0 A 1 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.24). 2 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.19). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 3 HDMI 1–6 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.21). 4 NETWORK jack For a wired connection to a network (p.25). 5 WIRELESS jack (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) For connecting to the supplied wireless antenna (p.28). 6 Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.26). B 7 AV 1–6 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.21). 8 AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a VCR) (p.26). 9 MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks: For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.21). VIDEO jack: For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and outputting video signals (p.21). C * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. A DC OUT jack For supplying power to a Yamaha AV accessory. For details on connections, refer to the instruction manual of the AV accessory. B SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.16). • The SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks are available on HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only. C VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.26). 0 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks (HTR-5067/TSR-5770) SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack (HTR-4067) For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.16). • (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 10 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 TRANSMIT indicator TRANSMIT 2 3 RECEIVER SLEEP C HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 AUX USB 5 FM AM 6 INFO MEMORY 4 3 Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). 4 AV 3 Lights up when remote control signals are transmitted. 3 SLEEP key A MODE key Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio reception (p.49). Switches the iPod operation modes (p.55). B External device operation keys Control playback of the iPod (p.53), USB storage device (p.57) or PCs/NAS (p.60). Also control playback or operate menus of the playback devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. 4 4 Input selection keys MOVIE 7 8 9 : NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING D MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER DIRECT BD DVD TV SETUP NET MODE E VOLUME ENTER RETURN RADIO OPTION F DISPLAY POP-UP MENU Select an input source for playback. HDMI 1–6 HDMI 1–6 jacks AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks AUX AUX jack (on the front panel) USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET Network sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) 5 Radio keys SCENE TOP MENU A B ZONE A Operate the FM/AM radio (p.49). FM Switches to FM radio. AM Switches to AM radio. MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. 6 INFO key MUTE G Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.71). 7 Sound mode keys • The playback devices must support HDMI Control. However, Yamaha does not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices. C RECEIVER z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. D ZONE keys Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A or Zone B (p.70). • ZONE keys function on HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only. E OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.72). F VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. G MUTE key Mutes the audio output. Select a sound mode (p.44). 8 SCENE keys Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.43). 9 SETUP key Displays the setup menu (p.76). 0 Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 11 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.12) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.16) Connect the speakers to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.19) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.21) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.24) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting to a network (wired LAN connection) (p.25) Connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable. 7 Connecting recording devices (p.26) Connect recording devices to the unit. 8 Connecting the power cable (p.26) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.27) Select the desired on-screen menu language. 10 Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) (p.28) Connect the unit to a network wirelessly. 11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.38) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 11 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 12 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Caution • (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.15). • (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models) Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 Ω. Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Abbr. Function 1 Front (L) Front (R) 2 Center 3 Surround (L) 4 Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Produce surround left/right channel sounds. 5 Surround (R) Surround back (L)*1 Surround back (R)* 7 Surround back* 8 Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. Subwoofer 9 Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. 1 6.1*1 5.1 5.1 (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●*2 ● ● ● ● ●* 2 ● ● ● ● ● 6 Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. 1 7.1*1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● *1 HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only *2 Place the surround speakers in front and set "Virtual CINEMA FRONT" (p.81) in the "Setup" menu to "On". • HTR-5067/TSR-5770 supports 2- to 7.1-channel system, and HTR-4067 supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system. • (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) You can connect two subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 12 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 13 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7.1-channel system (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) 1 9 2 3 1 9 4 9 5 10° to 30° 6 5.1-channel system 10° to 30° 2 3 4 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 30 cm (1 ft) or 7 more 6.1-channel system (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) 1 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) 2 1 2 4 9 3 4 9 5 3 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 8 • To utilize this configuration, set "Virtual CINEMA FRONT" (p.78) in the "Setup" menu to "On". • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 13 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 14 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4.1-channel system 2.1-channel system 1 2 1 9 2 9 4 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 3.1-channel system 1 9 2 3 PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 14 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 15 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Setting the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) STRAIGHT 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. CHARGE OUT 1 2 ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE ZONE 2 A 3 B VOL. SP IMP.••8¬MIN 4 5 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 15 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 16 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for 5.1and 7.1-channel systems as examples. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system. Caution 5.1-channel system 7.1-channel system (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) The unit (rear) The unit (rear) SPEAKERS DC OUT 5V 0.5A PB FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SPEAKERS DC OUT 5V 0.5A PB FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE SINGLE • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Y Y OR OUT OR OUT 1 1 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Cables required for connection (commercially available) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – + – 1 1 2 2 Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer) 9 4 9 3 5 9 4 5 6 • (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. The 2 subwoofers output the same sound. 3 7 • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 17 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Connecting speaker cables Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. b Loosen the speaker terminal. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks. To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE d Tighten the terminal. + (red) b c Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. Connecting Zone B speakers (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). To connect the Zone B speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)” (p.69). FR ON T a d • Surround back speakers or bi-amplified front speakers cannot be used while the Zone B function is enabled. - (black) Using a banana plug 1 (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) 2 a Tighten the speaker terminal. 3 b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. 9 a Banana plug FR ON T 4 5 b ■ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. Audio pin cable 1 • Surround back speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections. AV OUT 2 • The FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks output the same signals. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 17 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 18 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. HDMI cable Digital optical cable Component video cable OPTICAL ❑ COAXIAL jacks • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Digital coaxial cable • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission (through output) features. ❑ VIDEO jacks • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. Video pin cable ❑ AUDIO jacks (Stereo L/R jacks) Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). Stereo pin cable (Stereo mini jack) Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable. Stereo mini-plug cable PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 18 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 19 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. ■ HDMI connection ■ Component / composite video connection When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. The unit (rear) • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. HDMI input HDMI OUT jack HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 ARC HDMI 3 HDMI • If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. ARC HDMI HDMI AM PR ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO Video input (component video) OPTICAL O OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 O MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 1 AV 5 AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output (digital optical) COMPONENT VIDEO TV PR COMPONENT VIDEO The unit (rear) PR HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 PR PR PB PB Y Y PB PB Y ARC • You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: Y ANTENNA AM – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box • If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. (RADIO) FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO DC OU 5V 0.5 Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 OPTICAL O OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 1 To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.111). MONITOR OUT PR PB COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 (TV) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT O TV AV 1 AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output (digital optical) About Audio Return Channel (ARC) • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 19 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 20 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 Video input (composite video) VIDEO HDMI 6 ARC V V ANTENNA AM (RADIO) FM COMPONENT MONITOR OUT VIDEO PR PR PB PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO DC OU 5V 0.5 MONITOR OUT 1 OPTICAL OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 O AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT O (TV) AV 1 AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 20 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 21 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 Connecting playback devices The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. – Connecting an iPod (p.53) ■ Component video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. – Connecting a USB storage device (p.57) Output jacks on video device Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Component video • If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.22). ■ HDMI connection Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Analog Stereo You need to change the combination of video/audio input jacks (p.22). Video output (component video) AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks COMPONENT VIDEO The unit (rear) PR Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. PR HDMI 1–6 jacks HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 ARC HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 3 PB HDMI 6 (BD/DVD) PR PR PB PB Y Y PB Y AM PR Y COMPONENT VIDEO The unit (rear) PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI output HDMI ARC ( TV ) AV 1 (RADIO) FM HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR O O C C OPTICAL OPTICAL ANTENNA AM VIDEO HDMI 6 COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 ( TV ) AV 1 Video device COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL PB PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO DC OUT 5V 0.5A AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack HDMI MONITOR OUT 1 OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Video device If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–6, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Audio output (digital optical or digital coaxial) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.21). • To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–6 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.19 to 21). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 21 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 22 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Composite video connection ■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Video Digital coaxial Composite video Analog stereo AV 4–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO) Digital optical You need to change the combination of video/audio input jacks (p.22). Video output (composite video) AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jack HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 ARC HDMI 4 (RADIO) FM PR PB PB AV 4–6 (AUDIO) Component video Analog stereo AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) AV 4–6 (AUDIO) Composite video Digital optical AV 3–6 (VIDEO) AV 1 (OPTICAL) Video output (component video) AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks MONITOR OUT C ( TV ) AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) HDMI 1–6 Y VIDEO 1 AV 1 HDMI 1–6 Analog stereo Video device C COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT L 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT L L The unit (rear) PR L R PR R HDMI 1 HDMI OUT The unit (rear) COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL Digital coaxial HDMI For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y COMPONENT VIDEO Audio AV 1 (OPTICAL) ❑ Necessary setting V HDMI 5 ANTENNA AM Video HDMI 1–6 VIDEO V VIDEO Audio Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) R R (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDM PB PR Y ARC PB PB ANTENNA Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack, Audio output AV 4–6 (AUDIO) jacks (digital coaxial or analog stereo) AM (RADIO) FM Y Y PR PB If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Y COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L L L OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 R AV 6 R Video device R • To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.21). AV 5 AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (analog stereo) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 22 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 23 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. 5 6 1 2 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Audio output jacks on audio device Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 4–6 (AUDIO) AV 3 4 5 6 AUX USB NET ZONE B BD DVD TV NET RADIO SETUP ZONE A OPTION OPTION The unit (rear) Cursor keys ENTER VOLUME ENTER RETURN AV 2 Audio input jacks on the unit DISPLAY HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 H ARC O O ANTENNA AM 3 4 Press OPTION. PB SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ( TV ) COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 COAXIAL MONITOR OUT AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT R 1 L L L R R 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Audio device R AV 1–6 jacks Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV 5” (audio input jack to be used). Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. SLEEP MUTE OUT VOL. ECO Audio••••••AV5 6 COAXIAL Y VIDEO L AV 1 C ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Audio In ENHANCER STEREO TUNED C PB OPTICAL ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT OPTICAL PR Y COMPONENT VIDEO CHARGE COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. CHARGE 5 (RADIO) FM PR ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press OPTION. This completes the necessary settings. If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 23 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 24 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Connecting to the jack on the front panel 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable audio players to the unit. Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. FM antenna AM antenna SCENE BD DVD INPUT TONE CONTROL TV NET PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT AUX The unit (rear) AUDIO 5V 1A HDMI 1 HDMI OUT The unit (front) (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 NETWORK (NET) ARC ANTENNA AM (RADIO) FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB SPEAKERS DC OUT 5V 0.5A FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 Portable audio player OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing AUX, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. Assembling and connecting the AM antenna • You need to prepare the audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device. • For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.53) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.57). Hold down Insert Release • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 24 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 25 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 6 Connecting to a network (wired LAN connection) Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. You can also connect the unit to a network wirelessly. For details, see "Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only)" (p.28). • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. Network Attached Storage (NAS) Internet WAN PC LAN Modem Router Network cable HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 NETWORK (NET) HDMI 6 ARC ANTENNA AM (RADIO) FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y DC OUT 5V 0.5A FRONT VIDEO CENTER MONITOR OUT 1 OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT The unit (rear) • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.91). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network (wired LAN connection) En 25 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 26 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7 Connecting recording devices 8 Connecting the power cable You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks output analog video/audio signals selected as the input. Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. • To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 4–6 jacks of the unit. • To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 4–6 jacks or AUX jack of the unit. • Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices. Video/audio input • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. AV OUT jacks VOLTAGE SELECTOR VIDEO The unit (rear) V HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 The unit (rear) VOLTAGE SELECTOR V HDMI 5 L ARC L L R R 110V– 120V R ANTENNA AM (RADIO) FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO AV OUT Video recording device 220V– 240V SPEAKERS CENTER AUDIO SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) To an AC wall outlet SPEAKERS CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting recording devices En 26 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 27 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP RECEIVER z Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE 3 4 1 2 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING ENHANCER TV SETUP NET • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. RADIO SETUP OPTION VOLUME ENTER TOP MENU Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. DIRECT SCENE RETURN To exit from the menu, press SETUP. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS BD DVD 6 ENTER DISPLAY POP-UP MENU Cursor keys 3 4 MUTE Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER. MODE Setup Speaker English HDMI 日本語 Français Deutsch Español Русский Italiano Sound ECO Function Network Language 5 中文 Use the cursor keys to select the desired language. Setup Speaker English HDMI 日本語 Français Deutsch Español Русский Sound ECO Function Network Language Italiano 中文 PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 27 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 28 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 10 Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Attaching the wireless antenna • Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage the antenna. Attach the supplied wireless antenna to the unit. • When attaching the antenna, hold the root of the antenna and screw it into the WIRELESS jack tightly. Be sure to turn off the unit before attaching the antenna. • The antenna can be bent in only one direction. Check the orientation of the joint and bend the antenna in the proper direction. • Do not connect the antenna other than the supplied one. Screw in • When packing the unit, remove the antenna to prevent damage. LESS • The signal strength indicator on the front display indicates the strength of the wireless signal. WIRE Weak Strong Bend Joint LESS WIRE Turn clockwise to the vertical position LESS WIRE PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 28 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 29 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Selecting the connection method Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. Select a connection method according to your network environment. You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. ■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. You can also use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. Mobile device (such as iPhone) Internet Wireless router The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.36). Modem • You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.25) or the wireless LAN connection (p.28). • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the unit cannot connect to the Internet. Therefore, you cannot use any kind of Internet service such as Internet radio. Mobile device (such as iPhone) • For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website. The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.30). • You cannot use the wireless LAN connection simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.25) or Wireless Direct (p.36). • If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. • For details on "AV CONTROLLER", visit the Yamaha website. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 29 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 30 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Connecting the unit to a wireless network TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP RECEIVER z HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. Select a connection method according to your environment. AV 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MOVIE Do you own iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch)? ZONE A TV SETUP ENHANCER MODE Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER. No Does your wireless router (access point) has a WPS button? DIRECT NET RADIO SETUP OPTION VOLUME ENTER TOP MENU 5 MEMORY SCENE RETURN A (p.30) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS BD DVD Yes 4 POP-UP MENU MUTE Connection B (p.31) Wireless (Wi-Fi) No Cursor keys OK : ENTER Back : RETURN C (p.32) ENTER DISPLAY Network Connection Yes ■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting • The unit may connect automatically to the access point to which it has connected previously. In this case, the message indicating the successful connection will appear. You can ignore this message and proceed to the next step. You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS)” and press ENTER. • You need iOS device with iOS 5.0 or later. For details on supported devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.109). Wireless (Wi-Fi) 1 2 Select a setup method. WPS Button PIN Code Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS) Access Point Scan Manual Setting Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). OK : ENTER Back : RETURN • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 Press SETUP. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 30 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 31 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP RECEIVER z 8 Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable the screen lock on the iOS device. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING AV 6 USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE TV SETUP ENHANCER DIRECT NET MODE RADIO SETUP OPTION VOLUME ENTER TOP MENU Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. SCENE RETURN 1A ZONE A Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS BD DVD 5V You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. 1 2 AUX AUDIO 5 AUX ■ B: Using the WPS button configuration DISPLAY POP-UP MENU MUTE ENTER 9 Press ENTER on the remote control. 10 Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS device. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 11 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Connected” appears on the front display. If “Connection fail” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. • Depending on the model of the wireless router (access point), the unit may not connect to it. In this case, try connection with "Access Point Scan" or "Manual Setting" (p.32). • You can use “WPS Button” (p.7) in the “Setup” menu to set up a wireless connection with the WPS button. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 31 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 32 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ C: Using other connection methods TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP RECEIVER z HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING 1 2 AV 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MOVIE If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. ZONE A TV SETUP MODE Select a setup method. WPS Button PIN Code Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS) Access Point Scan Manual Setting Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). OK : ENTER Back : RETURN ENHANCER NET • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. DIRECT RADIO SETUP OPTION VOLUME ENTER TOP MENU Wireless (Wi-Fi) Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. MEMORY SCENE RETURN Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired connection method and press ENTER. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS BD DVD 7 POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY 3 4 Press SETUP. The following connection methods are available. WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the WPS PIN code” (p.33). Share Wi-Fi Settings(iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.30). Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.33). Manual Setting You can setup a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.34). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. MUTE 5 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER. Network Connection Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi) OK : ENTER Back : RETURN About WPS • The unit may connect automatically to the access point to which it has connected previously. In this case, the message indicating the successful connection will appear. You can ignore this message and proceed to the next step. PREPARATIONS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 32 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 33 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM 3 4 3 4 INFO ❑ Searching for an access point If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 AV MOVIE ❑ Using the WPS PIN code ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point and press ENTER. 1 The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point and press ENTER. The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. PIN Code MEMORY BASS ENHANCER Access Point Scan PIN Code : 00000000 MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT Enter the PIN code into the access point. DIRECT SSID: Access Point X Security: W PA - P S K ( T K I P ) Security Key: SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET RETURN TOP MENU SETUP VOLUME ENTER OK : ENTER Back : RETURN Edit : ENTER CANCEL : RETURN Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY POP-UP MENU Connect RADIO OPTION MUTE 2 MODE Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). 3 Press ENTER. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. Press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. 4 2 3 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Network Connection abc_ ( . 0 ← a n ) , 1 A b o [ ] { } < > * ! : ; _ | / \ $ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a B K S P S p a c e c d e f g h i p q r s t u v ? # % & ~ ^ ´ ’ ` 9 + - = D E L → j k l m w x y z OK CANCEL CLEAR Button functions [←]/[→]: Moves the cursor left and right. [Aa]: Switches the letter cases (upper/lower). [BKSP]: Deletes the character to the left of the selected one. [Space]: Enters a space. [DEL]: Deletes the selected character. When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 33 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 34 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press ENTER to start the connection process. HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 4 If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO 3 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING 5 ❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. Manual Setting To exit from the menu, press SETUP. SSID: Access Point X Security: None Security Key: MEMORY Connect MOVIE MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER DIRECT Edit : ENTER CANCEL : RETURN SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET TOP MENU SETUP OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN RADIO POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY MUTE MODE 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “SSID” and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point. Network Connection abc_ ( . 0 ← a n ) , 1 A b o [ ] { } < > * ! : ; _ | / \ $ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a B K S P S p a c e c d e f g h i p q r s t u v ? # % & ~ ^ ´ ’ ` 9 + - = D E L → j k l m w x y z OK CANCEL CLEAR When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 34 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 35 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 1 2 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE 3 4 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING TV SETUP ENHANCER 4 DIRECT NET MODE 7 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. SETUP VOLUME MUTE • If you select “None” in step 3, this item is not available. Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY POP-UP MENU Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press ENTER. RADIO OPTION ENTER TOP MENU When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from step 1. • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. SCENE RETURN Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press ENTER to start the connection process. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS BD DVD 6 Choices None, WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode AV 5 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption method. 5 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. If you select “WEP” in step 3, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. If you select the method other than “WEP” in step 3, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. Network Connection abc_ ( . 0 ← a n ) , 1 A b o [ ] { } < > * ! : ; _ | / \ $ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a B K S P S p a c e c d e f g h i p q r s t u v ? # % & ~ ^ ´ ’ ` 9 + - = D E L → j k l m w x y z OK CANCEL CLEAR When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 35 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 36 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP RECEIVER z Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) 7 HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MOVIE Choices None, WEP ZONE A • Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. MEMORY 1 2 MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER DIRECT SCENE BD DVD Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption method. TV SETUP NET RADIO SETUP OPTION 8 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press ENTER. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • If you select “None” in step 7, this item is not available. VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU MODE ENTER DISPLAY POP-UP MENU Cursor keys • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. MUTE 3 4 5 6 9 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. Enter any 5 or 13 character string. Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Network Connection abc_ ( . 0 ← a n ) , 1 A b o [ ] { } < > * ! : ; _ | / \ $ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a B K S P S p a c e c d e f g h i p q r s t u v ? # % & ~ ^ ´ ’ ` 9 + - = D E L → j k l m w x y z OK CANCEL CLEAR Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless Direct” and press ENTER. When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. Network Connection Connection Wireless Direct • Before proceeding to the next step, record the following information. These information will be needed to configure the Wi-Fi setting of a mobile device. – SSID displayed on the TV screen – Security key you have just entered OK : ENTER Back : RETURN PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 36 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 37 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 10 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Save” and TRANSMIT RECEIVER press ENTER to save the setting. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 This completes the settings and “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 4 Next, configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE 3 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. DIRECT b Select the SSID displayed in step 9 from the list of available access points. SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET TOP MENU SETUP OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN RADIO POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in step 9. 12 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. MUTE MODE PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network wirelessly (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 37 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 38 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE 3 4 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET RADIO RECEIVER z The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. • Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. • Please note the following when using YPAO. – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. The unit (front) – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. OPTION – Do not connect headphones. VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU MODE DISPLAY POP-UP MENU MUTE – Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 3 minutes). 1 2 1 2 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 9 3 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 4 5 • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. Ear height The following screen appears on the TV. VOLUME CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT 9 Auto Setup Start MIN MAX MIN MAX Exit • (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting YPAO. Press SETUP key to Start Power Amp Assign Basic “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.79) (HTR-5067/ TSR-5770 only) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 38 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 39 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Start” and press SETUP. 6 To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 3 4 The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the measurement immediately. Auto Setup AV 1 2 Measurement Finished Start 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE Exit ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING TV SETUP ENHANCER -3.0 / +10.0 dB DIRECT NET Auto Setup RADIO SETUP OPTION Start Exit Measurement Finished Result 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m VOLUME ENTER TOP MENU 3.0 / 10.5 m The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. SCENE RETURN Result MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS BD DVD SAVE 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch • To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the procedure in “Error messages” (p.40). ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU Cursor keys -3.0 / +10.0 dB OK:ENTER The adjusted speaker settings are applied. 1 2 • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 3 7 4 MUTE Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. MODE 1 The number of speakers (front side/rear side/subwoofer) Caution 2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest) • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 3 Adjustment range of speaker output level 4 Warning message (if available) • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.40) or “Warning messages” (p.41). • A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in the front display. • If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 39 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 40 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Auto Setup ERROR E-5:Noisy Start Error message Exit PROCEED 5% TV screen ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT E-5:NOISY ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Front display ■ Procedure to handle errors 1 2 Cause Remedy E-1:No Front SP (E-1:NO FRNT SP) Front speakers are not detected. E-2:No Sur. SP (E-2:NO SUR SP) One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-4:SBR → SBL (E-4:SBR → SBL) A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5:Noisy (E-5:NOISY) The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6:Check Sur. (E-6:CHECK SUR) Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7:No MIC (E-7:NO MIC) The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. E-8:No Signal (E-8:NO SIGNAL) The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9:User Cancel (E-9:CANCEL) The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary. E-10:Internal Err. (E-10:INTERNAL) An internal error has occurred. Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO Error message Check the content of error message and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. To exit the YPAO measurement: a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press ENTER. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning: Select “RETRY” and press ENTER. To proceed with the current YPAO measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only): Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 40 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 41 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Auto Setup Start Remedy Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. Result Exit 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / +10.0 dB OK:ENTER TV screen Problem speaker (blinks) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). W-2:Over Distance (W-2:DISTANCE) A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO W-1:PHASE ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable. W-1:Out of Phase (W-1:PHASE) Warning message W-1:Out of Phase CHARGE Cause Measurement Finished W-3:Level Error (W-3:LEVEL) Front display If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. ■ Procedure to handle warnings • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 1 Check the content of warning message and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. To save the measurement results: Select “SAVE” and press ENTER. To discard the measurement result: Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 3 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 42 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM PLAYBACK TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 Input selection keys Basic playback procedure AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE 3 4 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER DIRECT SCENE BD DVD 1 TV SETUP NET RADIO OPTION Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU VOLUME For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. MUTE • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.49) DISPLAY POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE • Playing back iPod music (p.53) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.57) • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.60) • Listening to Internet radio (p.64) • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.67) 4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.73). PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 42 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 43 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and target zones (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) with just one touch. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM 3 4 AV INFO MOVIE 3 4 1 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING Press SCENE. Configuring scene assignments 1 The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. MEMORY • Select an input source (p.42) • Select a sound program (p.44) • Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.48) MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. DIRECT • (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B (p.70) SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET TOP MENU SCENE Input Sound program Target zone Compressed (HTR-5067/ Music TSR-5770 Enhancer only) BD/DVD HDMI 1 MOVIE (Sci-Fi) Off VOLUME ENTER RETURN RADIO OPTION SCENE DISPLAY POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE SCENE link playback Zone A: enabled Zone B: disabled On Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE OUT VOL. ECO SET Complete TV AV 1 STRAIGHT On Zone A: enabled Zone B: disabled On NET NET RADIO MUSIC (7ch/5ch Stereo*) On Zone A: enabled Zone B: disabled Off RADIO MUSIC TUNER (7ch/5ch Stereo*) On Zone A: enabled Zone B: disabled Off ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL * HTR-5067/TSR-5770: 7ch Stereo, HTR-4067: 5ch Stereo • The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 43 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 44 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Selecting the sound mode TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY 3 4 3 4 AV MOVIE ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET RADIO OPTION This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.45). ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback TOP MENU MODE This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.46). DISPLAY POP-UP MENU This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.48). • Press MOVIE repeatedly. MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER DIRECT • Press MUSIC repeatedly. RETURN • Press ENHANCER. ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies VOLUME ENTER ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM on the front panel. • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz or playing back DTS Express, the straight decode mode (p.47) is automatically selected. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.8). MUTE ❑ Selecting a surround decoder • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.47). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.47). ❑ Switching to the direct playback mode • Press DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.48). ❑ Enabling Extra Bass • Press BASS. This mode lets you enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.48). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 44 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 45 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO Sci-Fi ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Sound program • You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.73) in the “Option” menu. • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set "CINEMA DSP 3D Mode" (p.85) in the "Setup" menu to "Off". ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 45 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 46 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side speakers. You can also select stereo playback. Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in front. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo 5ch Stereo (HTR-5067/TSR-5770: 7ch Stereo, HTR-4067: 5ch Stereo) Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.45) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.46) do not work when "2ch Stereo", "5ch Stereo" or "7ch Stereo" is selected. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 46 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 47 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Enjoying unprocessed playback TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM 3 4 ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) AV INFO MOVIE 3 4 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING MEMORY MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET 1 CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED MUTE SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO POP-UP MENU 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED STRAIGHT †‡Pro Logic bPro Logic bPLII Movie ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL MODE bPLIIx Movie* bPLII Music bPLIIx Music* • (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.73) in the “Option” menu to a setting other than “Off”. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO Press STRAIGHT. OUT TOP MENU For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.107). OUT VOLUME DISPLAY The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. CHARGE Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION ENTER RETURN RADIO SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) bPLII Game ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder) suitable for movies. Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder) suitable for music. bPLIIx Game* Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder) suitable for games. Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music. * HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only • (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. • You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 47 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 48 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE 3 4 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER DIRECT 1 Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is enabled or disabled. BASS DIRECT TV SETUP NET ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE SCENE BD DVD Press DIRECT. OUT RADIO VOL. ECO ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE DIRECT OPTION ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. 1 Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. “ENHANCER” lights up VOLUME ENTER CHARGE RETURN TOP MENU MODE DISPLAY POP-UP MENU • When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. MUTE – Selecting sound programs ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO Enhancer On ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL – Adjusting the tone control – Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources. – Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz – High-definition streaming audio Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass) Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.74) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. subwoofer. 1 Press BASS. Each time you press the key, Extra Bass is enabled or disabled. • You can also use “Extra Bass” (p.80) in the “Setup” menu to enable/disable Extra Bass. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 48 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 49 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Listening to FM/AM radio TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM 3 4 AV INFO 3 4 ZONE A NET ZONE B FM AM PRESET TUNING TUNING MEMORY • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. Selecting a frequency for reception 1 Press FM or AM to select a band. “TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently selected is displayed. • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT MOVIE BASS ENHANCER FM 87.50MHz Setting the frequency steps DIRECT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET 2 (Asia and General models only) At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. VOLUME ENTER RETURN RADIO OPTION DISPLAY Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. CHARGE TOP MENU MODE POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 OUT ECO Set the unit to standby mode. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. FM 98.50MHz When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. z (power) • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. PROGRAM 3 • You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.75) in the “Option” menu. STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”. CHARGE OUT ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. TU••••FM50/AM9 4 5 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 49 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 50 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Registering favorite radio stations (presets) TRANSMIT When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. RECEIVER SLEEP You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 1 2 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MOVIE 3 NET ZONE B FM AM PRESET TUNING MEMORY PRESET MEMORY ENHANCER Auto Preset TV SETUP NET TOP MENU MODE Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). OPTION VOLUME • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU • To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”. RADIO OPTION ENTER RETURN ■ Registering radio stations automatically (Auto Preset) ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ■ Registering a radio station manually Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.49) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. DIRECT SCENE BD DVD VOL. ECO 4 ZONE A MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS SLEEP MUTE OUT AV 5 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 3 Press OPTION. MUTE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT 01:FM 98.50MHz Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Auto Preset To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the registration immediately. • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset CHARGE ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE 02:Empty ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered VOL. 01:FM 87.50MHz SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO OUT ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset number SLEEP MUTE OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO CHARGE 4 The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset number from which to start the registration • To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just wait for 5 seconds). • To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 50 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 51 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP ■ Selecting a preset station ■ Clearing preset stations Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. 2 3 Press OPTION. HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY 3 4 ZONE A NET ZONE B FM AM PRESET TUNING PRESET CHARGE OUT ECO MOVIE ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOL. 01:FM 98.50MHz MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER STEREO TUNED DIRECT Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and press ENTER. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT BD DVD TV SETUP NET TOP MENU OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU Cursor keys • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. 4 ENTER DISPLAY ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Clear Preset RADIO OPTION SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO SCENE Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. MUTE CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO MODE 01:FM 98.50MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Preset station to be cleared If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO 01:Cleared ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 5 Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared. 6 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 51 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 52 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Radio Data System tuning TRANSMIT • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. RECEIVER SLEEP (U.K. and Europe models only) HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MOVIE 3 4 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER DIRECT 1 SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET TOP MENU MODE Cursor keys • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.50). ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN RADIO OPTION ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information MUTE 2 Press INFO. ■ Receiving traffic information automatically When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. • To cancel the search, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. CHARGE OUT ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO CLASSICS ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. TP FM101.30MHz ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Traffic information station (frequency) Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 52 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 53 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Playing back iPod music TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. AV 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE ENHANCER TV SETUP NET TOP MENU MODE • For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.109). Connecting an iPod • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.55). • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. RADIO OPTION Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME ENTER RETURN You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. USB DIRECT SCENE BD DVD • You cannot play back iPod video on the unit. ZONE A MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS Playback of iPod content DISPLAY POP-UP MENU MUTE 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. iPod Top Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. Music Videos The unit (front) RADIO STRAIGHT AUX 1/2 AUDIO 5V 1A • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO Connected ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to change without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 53 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 54 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 2 TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. ■ Browse screen 1 HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 3 4 3 4 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AV AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY 2 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING 4 iPod Music iPod Now Playing Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers 3 Artist Name 5 1/6 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing Album Name Song Title MOVIE MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER 2:30 [DISPLAY] to List Browse SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET 5:10 1 List name DIRECT 2 Contents list Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. RADIO OPTION 3 Item number/total VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU MODE DISPLAY D POP-UP MENU MUTE Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.55). 4 Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.56) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. Moves to the previous page of the list. Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 54 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 55 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Playback screen TRANSMIT RECEIVER 1 SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY 3 4 Album Name ZONE B PRESET TUNING ENHANCER 1 Status indicators DIRECT Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.56) and playback status (such as play/pause). SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET TOP MENU 2 Playback information VOLUME DISPLAY POP-UP MENU To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. 2 Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to start playback. Operational remote control Function keys RADIO OPTION ENTER RETURN 5:10 [DISPLAY] to List Browse MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS 2 Song Title ZONE A NET Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. Artist Name 2:30 MOVIE 1 iPod Now Playing AV 1 ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Cursor keys Select an item. Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. ENTER Confirms the selection. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. External device operation keys MUTE MODE External device operation keys MODE a Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Skips forward/backward. External device operation keys d Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. s Stops playback. f g h j Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (while holding down). h j Searches forward/backward (by holding down). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 55 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 56 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Repeat/shuffle settings TRANSMIT You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod. RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING • During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. AV 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MOVIE ZONE A MEMORY MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET RADIO OPTION • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU MODE ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU Cursor keys 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. MUTE MODE Item Repeat (Repeat) Shuffle (Shuffle) 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 56 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 57 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Playing back music stored on a USB storage device TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. AV 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE ZONE A ENHANCER DIRECT SCENE BD DVD USB • For details on playable USB devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.109). TV SETUP NET RADIO OPTION 1 • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. The unit (front) 1 RADIO STRAIGHT TOP MENU Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME ENTER RETURN You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. Connecting a USB storage device MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS Playback of USB storage device contents AUX DISPLAY POP-UP MENU AUDIO MUTE 5V 1A USB Top MODE Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 1/12 USB storage device • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO Connected ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 57 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 58 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM 2 TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP ■ Browse screen Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 1 HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 3 4 3 4 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AV AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY 2 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING USB Now Playing 4 USB Top Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 3 Artist Name 5 1/12 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing Album Name Song Title MOVIE MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET TOP MENU MODE 1 List name [DISPLAY] to List Browse 2 Contents list Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN 2:30 DIRECT POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY D MUTE DISPLAY 3 Item number/total • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. 4 Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.59) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. Moves to the previous page of the list. Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 58 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 59 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Playback screen TRANSMIT ■ Repeat/shuffle settings You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB storage device contents. RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B USB Now Playing 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM 1 Artist Name AV Album Name Song Title ZONE A TUNING ENHANCER 1 Status indicators DIRECT TV SETUP NET TOP MENU OPTION VOLUME Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. RADIO OPTION ENTER • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.59) and playback status (such as play/pause). SCENE RETURN Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. MEMORY MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS BD DVD 2 [DISPLAY] to List Browse PRESET INFO When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 2:30 MOVIE 1 MUTE MODE External device operation keys 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. External device operation keys Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d 3 Repeat (Repeat) Stops playback temporarily. f g Skips forward/backward. Shuffle (Shuffle) 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 59 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 60 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.25). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu. • (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.109). Media sharing setup To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed ❑ For Windows Media Player 12 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. 5 Click “OK” to exit. ❑ For Windows Media Player 11 1 2 3 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. 4 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. • For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 60 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 61 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Playback of PC music contents TRANSMIT 3 RECEIVER SLEEP Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY 3 NET ZONE B SERVER Now Playing NET • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. TUNING • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER 1 DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME Album Name Song Title 2:30 Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. Cursor keys [DISPLAY] to List Browse • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY D POP-UP MENU Artist Name The browse screen is displayed on the TV. OPTION ENTER RETURN If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. ZONE A PRESET MOVIE 4 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. MUTE SERVER Top • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. DESKTOP NAS A NAS B NOTE DISPLAY MODE • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. 1/4 • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 61 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 62 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Browse screen TRANSMIT ■ Playback screen RECEIVER 1 SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE 3 4 2 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING BASS ENHANCER TV SETUP NET Album Name Song Title 1/14 [DISPLAY] to List Browse [DISPLAY] to Now Playing 1 Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.63) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Contents list Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. RADIO VOLUME RETURN TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY Use the following remote control keys to control playback. 4 Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.63) and playback status (such as play/pause). MUTE MODE External device operation keys 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. Moves to the previous page of the list. 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. 3 Item number/total ENTER 2 2:30 1 List name OPTION 1 Artist Name 5 DIRECT SCENE BD DVD SERVER Now Playing Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 3 MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 4 SERVER NAS A 4 External device operation keys Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Skips forward/backward. Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.92). Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 62 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 63 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Repeat/shuffle settings TRANSMIT You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC music content. RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING AV 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MOVIE 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. ZONE A MEMORY MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS ENHANCER • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. DIRECT • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET OPTION TOP MENU MODE OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN RADIO POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. MUTE Repeat (Repeat) Shuffle (Shuffle) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 63 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 64 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Listening to Internet radio TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING AV 5 6 AUX USB • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. ZONE A NET • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.25). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu. FM AM INFO MEMORY • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. MOVIE BASS ENHANCER Playback of Internet radio Follow the procedure below to select an Internet radio station and start playback. You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 • This service may be discontinued without notice. DIRECT The browse screen is displayed on the TV. SCENE BD DVD TV SETUP NET Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. RADIO OPTION NET RADIO Top VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU Bookmarks Locations Genres New Stations Popular Stations Podcasts Help ENTER RETURN DISPLAY D POP-UP MENU Cursor keys MUTE DISPLAY MODE 1/7 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. NET RADIO Now Playing Station Name Album Name Song Title 2:30 [DISPLAY] to List Browse • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 64 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 65 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Browse screen TRANSMIT ■ Playback screen RECEIVER 1 SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE 3 4 2 ZONE A NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING BASS ENHANCER TV SETUP NET 5 1 Station Name Album Name Song Title 2 2:30 1/7 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing [DISPLAY] to List Browse 1 List name 1 Playback indicator 2 Contents list 2 Playback information DIRECT SCENE BD DVD NET RADIO Now Playing Bookmarks Locations Genres New Stations Popular Stations Podcasts Help 3 MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 4 NET RADIO Top 4 Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. RADIO OPTION Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. 3 Item number/total VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU MODE ENTER DISPLAY POP-UP MENU • Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback. Cursor keys 4 Playback indicator • Some information may not be available depending on the station. 5 Operation menu MUTE External device operation keys Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. Moves to the previous page of the list. Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 65 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 66 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 AUX USB 3 4 ■ Registering the station with the Option menu AV FM AM INFO MEMORY 3 PRESET MOVIE 4 ZONE A NET ENHANCER TV SETUP NET TUNING 1 2 DIRECT TOP MENU MODE RADIO OPTION OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN MUTE While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY POP-UP MENU You can switch the language. Follow the procedure below to register your favorite station to the “Bookmarks” folder. SCENE BD DVD Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. ZONE B MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS 3 • On the playback screen, the current station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. On the browse screen, the station selected in the list is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. Enter the vTuner ID in this area. • To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the folder and then “Bookmark Off”. ■ Registering the station on the vTuner website You can also register your favorite Internet radio stations on the vTuner website. 1 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 • To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-mail address. 4 Register your favorite radio stations. Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name. • To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name. Check the vTuner ID of the unit. You can find the vTuner ID (MAC address of the unit) in “Information” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 66 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 67 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Playing back music with AirPlay The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes or iPod touch/iPhone/iPad music on the unit via network.” Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. • This section describes "iPod touch", "iPhone" and "iPad" as the "iPod". "iPod" refers to "iPod touch", "iPhone" and "iPad", unless otherwise specified. 1 iTunes Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( PC iTunes (example) ) appears. iPod (example) Router The unit iPod (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 can be connected wirelessly to a network.) • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.25). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu. iPod (example) • When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. Network name of the unit • For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.109). 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. • The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music with AirPlay En 67 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 68 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Use the following remote control keys to control playback. TRANSMIT • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu. AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. ZONE A • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.75) in the “Option” menu to “Off”. TV SETUP MODE Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f Skips forward/backward. Caution ENHANCER NET • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. DIRECT RADIO OPTION • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. iTunes (example of English version) ■ Playback screen VOLUME ENTER TOP MENU a g SCENE RETURN Function MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS BD DVD External device operation keys DISPLAY POP-UP MENU MUTE External device operation keys 1 AirPlay Now Playing Artist Name Album Name 2 Song Title 2:30 5:30 1 Playback indicator Check this box 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music with AirPlay En 68 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 69 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) The Zone A/B function allows you to play back an input source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). Preparing Zone B For example, you can turn on Zone A (turn off Zone B) when you are in the living room, and turn on Zone B (turn off Zone A) when you are in the study room. Also, you can turn on both zones when you want to enjoy the same input source in those rooms simultaneously. Connect the device that will be used in Zone B to the unit. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Connect the speakers placed in Zone B to the unit with speaker cables. To utilize the SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks for Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone B” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. Study room (Zone B) The unit (rear) SPEAKERS DC OUT 5V 0.5A PB FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE Y OR OUT 1 Living room (Zone A) 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT • Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the zone B. • The same input source is applied to both Zone A and Zone B. 1 • By default, the volume for Zone B changes in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. If there is volume difference between Zone A/B, you can correct it in “ZoneB Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.70). Also, you can adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.70). • You can automatically enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B in conjunction with a scene selection (p.43) 1 9 2 2 3 4 5 Zone B Zone A PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 69 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 70 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM TRANSMIT TRANSMIT RECEIVER 1 SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 ■ Basic playback procedure 4 Input selection keys 5 Press ZONE A or ZONE B to enable/disable audio output to Zone A or Zone B. 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING ENHANCER DIRECT SCENE (BD/DVD) SCENE (TV) RADIO OPTION SCENE TV SETUP NET OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU MODE VOLUME DISPLAY POP-UP MENU MUTE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE ZONE A ZONE B MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS BD DVD “ZONE A” and/or “ZONE B” lights up ZONE A OUT 1 2 ECO ■ Adjusting the volume for Zone B separately PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE ZONE 2 A 3 B VOL. HDMI1 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. 4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. ENTER RETURN ■ Correcting volume difference between Zone A and Zone B If you are bothered by volume difference between Zone A/B, follow the procedure below to adjust the volume for Zone B. 1 2 You can separately adjust the volume for Zone B using the remote control when “ZoneB Volume” (p.87) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Async.”. 1 To set the remote control to the Zone B operation mode, while holding down the cursor key (r), hold down SCENE (TV) for more than 3 seconds. TRANSMIT blinks twice. MUTE Cursor keys To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • This setting is not effective when “ZoneB Volume” (p.87) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Async.”. 6 AV MOVIE 4 Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Volume Trim” (Volume Trim) and press ENTER. 2 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume for Zone B. • To mute the audio output to Zone B, press MUTE. 3 To set the remote control to the Zone A operation mode, while holding down the cursor key (r), hold down SCENE (BD/DVD) for more than 3 seconds. TRANSMIT blinks twice. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ZoneB Trim” (ZB.Trim) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the setting. Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) En 70 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 71 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Viewing the current status TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 Switching information on the front display AV 1 2 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. ENHANCER TV NET RADIO VOL. ECO Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT †‡Pro Logic VOLUME DISPLAY POP-UP MENU SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO TOP MENU ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Audio Decoder OPTION ENTER RETURN SLEEP MUTE OUT DIRECT SCENE SETUP ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE INFO MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS BD DVD 1 ZONE A ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Information MUTE MODE • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item HDMI 1–6 AV 1–6 AUX Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) USB SERVER AirPlay NET RADIO Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * During simple playback of iPod: Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.52). * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 71 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 72 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE OUT VOL. ECO Tone Control ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Front display • Default settings are underlined. • Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available. For details, refer to each manual on the supplied CD-ROM. Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 73 DSP Level (DSP Level) Adjusts the sound field effect level. 73 Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 73 (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. 73 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 74 Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. 74 Option Tone Control Page DSP/Surround Volume Trim Lipsync Signal Info Audio In DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround) Extended Surround (EXTD) TV screen 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. (SW.Trim) 74 (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Corrects volume differences between Zone A/B. 70 Lipsync (Lipsync) Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup” menu. 74 Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. 74 Audio In (Audio In) Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. 75 Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. 75 Auto Preset (Auto Preset) Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets. 50 Clear Preset (Clear Preset) Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. 51 ZoneB Trim (ZB.Trim) PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 72 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 73 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM (U.K. and Europe models only) Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. Page 52 Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.56), USB storage device (p.59), or media server (p.63). — Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.56), USB storage device (p.59), or media server (p.63). — Volume Interlock (Interlock) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 75 Bookmark On (Bookmark On) Bookmark Off (Bookmark Off) Adds your favorite Internet radio station to the "Bookmarks" folder, or removes it from the "Bookmarks" folder. 66 ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) Configures the sound field program and surround settings. ❑ DSP Level (DSP Level) Adjusts the sound field effect level. Setting range -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Settings On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. Volume: low On Off Volume: high On Off Input level ❑ Extended Surround (EXTD) (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) • You can also adjust the tone with the front panel controls. Press TONE CONTROL to select "Treble" or "Bass", then press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. ■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. Input level Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. ❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Output level Function Output level Item Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. Settings Auto (Auto) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected, the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel. bPLIIx Movie (bPLIIxMo) Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround back speakers are connected. bPLIIx Music (bPLIIxMu) Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES (EX/ES) Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. Off (Off) Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.) PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 73 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 74 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Lipsync (Lipsync) • Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing back those sources. Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.86) in the “Setup” menu. ❑ Enhancer (Enhancer) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Settings Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.48). • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.48). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment. On (On) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment. Default AirPlay: Off (Off) Others: On (On) ■ Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. Default TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) Choices ■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal Channel (CHAN) The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE. Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. ❑ Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Sampling (SAMPL) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate (B RATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Video In (V IN) Type and resolution of the input digital signal Video Out (V OUT) Type and resolution of the output digital signal • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) • To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly. ❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 74 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 75 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Audio In (Audio In) ■ Volume Interlock (Interlock) Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–6 or AV 1–6) with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output • Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks (such as game consoles) Input sources HDMI 1–6, AV 1–6 Settings Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited (Ltd) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to 0 dB and mute). Full (Full) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). ■ Setup procedure (To input audio through a digital optical jack) Select “AV 1” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital optical cable. (To input audio through a digital coaxial jack) Select “AV 2” or “AV 3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital coaxial cable. (To input audio through analog audio jacks) Select “AV 4”, “AV 5”, or “AV 6”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable. ■ Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with the selected audio source. For example, you can watching the video while listening to the radio. Input sources TUNER, USB, (network sources), AUX Settings Off (Off) Does not output video. HDMI 1–6, AV 1–6 Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 75 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 76 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 4 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. • If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen (p.97). 1 2 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Network Language 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Network Language • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 76 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 77 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Setup menu items Menu Item Function Page Power Amp Assign (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Selects a speaker system. 79 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 79 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 79 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 79 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 80 Surround Back (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 80 Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 80 Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 80 Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. 80 Virtual CINEMA FRONT Configuration Speaker Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. 81 Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 81 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 81 Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 81 Enables/disables the test tone output. 82 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 83 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 83 Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 83 Test Tone HDMI Configuration TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 83 Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 83 ARC Enables/disables ARC. 84 SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 84 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 77 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 78 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Menu Item Function CINEMA DSP 3D Mode DSP Parameter Sound Page Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 85 Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 85 Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 85 Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 85 Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 85 Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 86 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 86 Scale Switches the scale of the volume display. 86 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 86 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 86 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 86 ZoneB Volume (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. 87 Auto Power Standby Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 88 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 88 Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 89 Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 89 Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 89 Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 90 Information Displays the network information on the unit. 91 Network Connection (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Selects the network connection method. 91 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 91 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 92 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 92 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 92 Lipsync Volume ECO Function Memory Guard DC OUT Network Language Power Mode Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 92 Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. 93 Select an on-screen menu language. 93 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 78 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 79 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Speaker Configures the speaker settings manually. Front Selects the size of the front speakers. • Default settings are underlined. Settings ■ Configuration Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Power Amp Assign (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Selects a speaker system. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Center In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the Zone B speakers or bi-amp connection. Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings Settings Basic Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using Zone B speakers or a bi-amp connection). BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp connections (p.17). Zone B Select this option when you use Zone B speakers (p.69) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone (Zone A). Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. Settings Use Select this option when a subwoofer is connected. The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 79 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 80 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Surround Crossover Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers. Settings Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Surround Back Settings (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Normal Does not reverse the subwoofer phase. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase. Settings Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Small x2 Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce surround back channel audio. Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Settings Off Disables Extra Bass. On Enables Extra Bass. • You can also use BASS on the remote control to enable/disable Extra Bass (p.48). • “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone B”, or when “Surround” is set to “None”. • "Surround Back" is not available when "Virtual CINEMA FRONT" is set to "On". CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 80 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 81 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Virtual CINEMA FRONT Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. Settings ■ Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. EQ Select Selects the type of equalizer to be used. Off Disables the front 5-channel speaker configuration. On Enables the front 5-channel speaker configuration. • Select "On" only when utilizing the Virtual CINEMA FRONT configuration (p.13). • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. Settings PEQ Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO measurement (p.38). GEQ Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. Off Does not use the equalizer. ■ Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. • “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.38). ■ Manual equalizer adjustment Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only), Surround Back R (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only), Subwoofer 1 2 Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”. Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain. Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft) Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Equalizer ■ Level EQ Select GEQ Edit Channel 63Hz 160Hz 400Hz 1kHz 2.5kHz 6.3kHz 16kHz Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only), Surround Back R (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only), Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB Others: -1.0 dB Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired speaker channel. GEQ Front L Back:RETURN 4 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 81 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 82 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Settings Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 82 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 83 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM HDMI Configures the HDMI settings. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Configuration Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–6) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Settings HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.111). Off (When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. Auto (When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”) Automatically selects whether to output videos/audio depending on the status of the connected device. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Settings Off Disables HDMI Control. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”. TV Audio Input • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.111) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AV 1–6 Default AV 4 Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit. • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. On Enables the audio output from the speakers. HDMI OUT (TV) Standby Sync Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Settings On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 83 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 84 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ARC Enables/disables ARC (p.21) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. SCENE Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection. • TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device • Playback device: starting playback Choices (SCENE keys) BD/DVD, TV, NET, RADIO Settings Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. Default BD/DVD, TV: On NET, RADIO: Off • SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 84 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 85 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Sound Configures the audio output settings. • Default settings are underlined. ■ DSP Parameter Configures the surround decoder settings. CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.45). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch Stereo). Settings Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) is selected. Setting range -3 to 0 to +3 Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected. Setting range 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is enabled, you can wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) is selected. Settings Off Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) is selected. Setting range 0 to 3 to 7 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 85 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 86 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Lipsync ■ Volume Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Configures the volume settings. Scale • You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.74) in the “Option” menu. Select Switches the scale of the volume display. Settings Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. dB Displays the volume in the “dB” unit. Setting range 0-97 Displays the volume in the numeric value (0.5 to 97.0). Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Maximum Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Min/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. • “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit. Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”. Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [50.0 to 95.0 (5.0 increments), 97.0] Initial Volume Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output. -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB increments) Sets the level to the specified volume level. [0.5 to 97.0 (0.5 increments)] CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 86 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 87 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ZoneB Volume (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. Settings Sync. Adjusts the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. Async. Does not adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. Adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.70). • If “ZoneB Volume” is set to “Async.”, the volume for Zone B is temporarily set to -40 dB. As necessary, adjust the volume using the remote control (p.70). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 87 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 88 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ECO Configures the power supply settings. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Auto Power Standby Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and the unit has not detected any input signal for the specified time. 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 minutes Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. ■ ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. • Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 88 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 89 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Function Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. 3 • Default settings are underlined. ■ Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. Input sources HDMI 1–6, AV 1–6, USB, AUX • To cancel the entry, press RETURN. 4 5 To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. ■ Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. ■ Procedure 1 To confirm the new name, press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed and press ENTER. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.88) is set to “On”. • To select a name from the presets, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source and the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a character. Input Rename HDMI1 ■ Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Settings Off Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. B l u - r a y OK:ENTER CANCEL:RETURN • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. o Memory Guard Memory Guard Icon On Back:RETURN CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 89 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 90 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ DC OUT Configures the DC OUT jack setting. Power Mode Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT jack. Settings Continuous Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of the power state (on/standby) of the unit. Power Sync. Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the unit is turned on. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 90 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 91 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Network Configures the network settings. ■ IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). • Default settings are underlined. DHCP ■ Information Select whether to use a DHCP server. Displays the network information on the unit. Settings Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack Connection * Connection method SSID * The access point to which the unit is connected Security * The encryption method for your network MAC Address MAC address IP Address IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner) * HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only ■ Network Connection Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Selects the network connection method. Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Choices Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable. Wireless (Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.30). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.36). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 91 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 92 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ MAC Address Filter ■ Network Standby Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings • Operation of the AirPlay function (p.67) or the DMC is not limited by this setting. Off Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Filter Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings Off Disables the MAC address filter. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. ■ Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. ■ Procedure 1 2 ■ Procedure Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a character. Network Name 1 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10). 3 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Y a m a h a x x x x x x Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Back:RETURN 3 4 To confirm the new name, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 92 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 93 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM ■ Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. Language Select an on-screen menu language. Perform Update Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the unit’s firmware” (p.97). Firmware Version Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit. System ID Displays the system ID number. • Default settings are underlined. Settings English English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • Japanese and Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 93 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 94 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) ADVANCED SETUP menu items Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 Set the unit to standby mode. • Default settings are underlined. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) PROGRAM 3 4 5 Item Function SP IMP. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Changes the speaker impedance setting. 94 REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 95 TU (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 95 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 95 INIT Restores the default settings. 95 UPDATE Updates the firmware. 96 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 96 STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Page Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO SP IMP.••8¬MIN ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings 6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. 8 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 94 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 95 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE REMOTE ID••ID1 OUT TV FORMAT•NTSC ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1, ID2 1 Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images on the TV screen do not appear correctly. Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL Restoring the default settings (INIT) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE • Once the remote control ID is selected successfully, TRANSMIT indicator blinks twice. If it blinks six times, selecting has failed. Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) (Asia and General models only) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV. ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control To select ID1, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (BD/DVD) for more than 3 seconds. To select ID2, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (TV) for more than 3 seconds. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO VOL. ECO OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO INIT••••CANCEL ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Restores the default settings for the unit. Choices ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. VOL. ECO TU••••FM50/AM9 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 95 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 96 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Updating the firmware (UPDATE) ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO UPDATE•••••USB ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the envelope icon (p) will appear in the screen. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware” (p.97). Checking the firmware version (VERSION) CHARGE OUT ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SLEEP MUTE VOL. VERSION••xx.xx ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.93) in the “Setup” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 96 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 97 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Updating the unit’s firmware via the network TRANSMIT RECEIVER SLEEP New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 3 4 NET ZONE B PRESET TUNING AV 5 6 AUX USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE ZONE A ENHANCER • If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.96). DIRECT TV SETUP NET VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU MODE RADIO OPTION • To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.96). Cursor keys • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. 5 If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press z (power) on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. ENTER DISPLAY POP-UP MENU SETUP Use the cursor keys to select “Perform Update” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update starts. • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). SCENE BD DVD 4 Note MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BASS • To cancel the operation without updating the firmware, press SETUP. MUTE • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.96). 1 2 Press SETUP. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “Network Update” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press ENTER. If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen. Network Update p Icon Perform Update Firmware Version System ID x.xx xxxxxxxx Update:ENTER Back:RETURN CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 97 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 98 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize the speaker settings again (p.38). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.79). Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.86). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.86). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. I want to display a device name or a manufacture name on the front display when selecting an input source... By default, input source names (such as “HDMI 1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like, use “Input Rename” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.89). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.95). You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.74). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode… I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.83) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.111). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 98 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 99 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.17). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.88). The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.94). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.17). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 99 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 100 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.4). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.95). The remote control is set to the Zone B operation mode. Set the remote control to the Zone A operation mode (p.70). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 100 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 101 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Audio Problem No sound. The volume cannot be increased. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) No sound is coming from the surround back speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.74). (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled. Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.86). A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.74). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.82). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.38) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.79). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform YPAO (p.38) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.81). (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled. Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used (p.73). “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone B”. When “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone B”, you cannot use the surround back speakers. To use the surround back speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” to “Basic” (p.79). The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.80). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.38) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.79). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 101 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 102 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Problem No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.83). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.19). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.83). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.84). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.74). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. Noise/hum is heard. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.88). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. The sound is distorted. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 102 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 103 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV. The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.74). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.113). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.19 to 21). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Cause Remedy The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. FM/AM radio Problem There is multi-path interference. FM radio reception is weak or noisy. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.49). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.49). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.49). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.50). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 103 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 104 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.91). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.91). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.60). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.92). The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.60). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.92). The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.96). The iPod does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay. The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router. Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit does not detect the PC. The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. The application for smartphone/tablet "AV CONTROLLER" does not detect the unit. (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 104 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 105 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Problem (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Wireless network is not found. Cause Remedy Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 105 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 106 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.60). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.53). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.25). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. DC Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the AV accessory connected to the DC OUT jack. Turn off the unit and reconnect your AV accessory. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) Internet radio has been selected as the input source when using Wireless Direct. You cannot use Internet radio when using Wireless Direct. To listen to Internet radio, connect the unit to a router. No device Not available The DHCP server is not found. Make sure the DHCP server function on your router is enabled. The network cable is not connected. Connect the network cable properly. (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 only) The wireless router (access point) is not found. Make sure the wireless router (access point) is turned on. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.95). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.60). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. Not connected Unable to play USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 106 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 107 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Glossary Audio information ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS-ES DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 107 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 108 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. ■ Others Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. HDMI and video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. Network information SSID SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 108 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 109 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Yamaha technologies Supported devices and file formats CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA ■ Supported devices ❑ USB devices • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. ❑ iPod Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Made for. Virtual CINEMA DSP iPod classic Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G (as of January 2014) • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. ❑ AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of January 2014) APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats En 109 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 110 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM About HTC Connect This receiver features “HTC Connect”, a simple way to enjoy all music content from your HTC Connect certified smartphone. 1. HTC Connect music streaming provided on this product has been developed based on interoperability testing as defined by the HTC Connect program with the HTC Connect compatible smartphones. Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. Video device The unit TV 2. HTC Connect has been tested with MP3 and AAC encoding formats. Other formats may not be compatible. 3. High network congestion may interfere with the operation of HTC Connect. 4. Music navigation via the music progress bar is not currently supported with HTC Connect. Please check HTC website for up to date information about features, compatible devices and audio format support: http://www.htc-connect.com/certified-devices HDMI in ■ File formats HDMI HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI ❑ USB • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, 96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files. COMPONENT VIDEO in • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. COMPONENT VIDEO ❑ PC/NAS • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only). COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y • The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, 96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files. • To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. VIDEO VIDEO in VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO APPENDIX ➤ Video signal flow En 110 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 111 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. Information on HDMI For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. 1 2 Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. Operations available from the TV’s remote control a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. • Standby synchronization b Press SETUP. • Volume control including mute BD DVD • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner SETUP • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) TV CD SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER MUTE c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER. HDMI Control HDMI Control RADIO OPTION Setup The unit turns off (standby) Playback device also turns off Speaker Configuration HDMI Sound Turn off the TV ECO Function Network Operations available from the unit’s remote control Language • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.43) • Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed) d Press ENTER again. • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “On” as shown below. (Example) HDMI Control Configuration HDMI Control Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) Turns on and displays video from the playback device HDMI Control On Audio Output Auto Standby Through Auto TV Audio Input Standby Sync ARC AV4 Auto On SCENE Back: RETURN APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 111 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 112 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM f If you made a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select "TV Audio Input" and the cursor keys (e/r) to select "AV 1". g Press SETUP. 3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 5 6 7 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. 1 2 Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: – “ARC” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. – The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Check the followings. Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 8 Audio Return Channel (ARC) Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.19). • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. • “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.83) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.43), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 112 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 113 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 113 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 114 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Reference diagram (rear panel) HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 NETWORK (NET) ARC ANTENNA AM (RADIO) FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB SPEAKERS DC OUT 5V 0.5A FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT (HTR-5067/TSR-5770 U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 114 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 115 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. (For HTR-4067) Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. "Made for iPod" and "Made for iPhone" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Android™ Android is a trademark of Google Inc. (For HTR-5067/TSR-5770) Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. This receiver supports network connections. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of HTC Corporation. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 115 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 116 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Specifications Input jacks • Analog Audio Audio x 4 (AV 4–6, AUX [Mini Jack]) • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 1 (AV 1) Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3) • Video Composite x 4 (AV 3–6) • Video Composite x 2 (MONITOR OUT, AV OUT) Component x 1 (MONITOR OUT) • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 1 Other jacks HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–6) • Other jacks [HTR-5067/TSR-5770] • Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A • HDMI Features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC Network (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - NETWORK (Wireless) x 1 (IEEE802.11b/IEEE802.11g) - 576i/50 Hz [HTR-4067] - 480p/60 Hz - USB x 1 (USB2.0) - 576p/50 Hz - NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz SURROUND BACK L/R*) * Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE B] - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2, mono) - AV OUT x 1 - Headphone x 1 (PHONES) [HTR-4067] - Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R) FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) HDMI - 480i/60 Hz - Speaker Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, [Other models] • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory - NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) [HTR-5067/TSR-5770] FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) • DC OUT x 1 - VGA • Analog Audio [U.K. and Europe models] USB - USB x 1 (USB2.0) Output jacks • Analog Tuner • YPAO MIC x 1 Component x 2 (AV 1–2) • HDMI Input TUNER • PC Client Function • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 • AirPlay supported • Internet Radio Wireless Network [HTR-5067/TSR-5770] • Wireless LAN Standards IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz - 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - Dolby TrueHD - Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital - DTS-HD Master Audio • Radio Frequency Band 2.4 GHz • WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) Push-Button-Method, PIN Method • Wireless Direct Direct connection with mobile devices • Security Type - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), - DTS Express Mixed Mode - DTS - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) - Subwoofer Out x 1 (SUBWOOFER PRE OUT) - AV OUT x 1 - Headphone x 1 (PHONES) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible • Link Function: CEC supported APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 116 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 117 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital EX [HTR-5067/TSR-5770] - Dolby Digital - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Post Decoding Format [HTR-5067/TSR-5770] - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema [HTR-4067] - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Audio Section • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) [U.S.A. and Canada models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω) [Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................80 W+80 W [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................95 W+95 W Center ............................................................................... 95 W Surround L/R...........................................................95 W+95 W Surround Back L/R [HTR-5067/TSR-5770] ............ 95 W+95 W • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) AV 4 etc. (DIRECT) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out) [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) ......................................................................... 110 dB or more Front L/R.....................................................................115 W/ch Center ........................................................................115 W/ch Surround L/R ..............................................................115 W/ch Surround Back L/R [HTR-5067/TSR-5770].................115 W/ch • Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) [China, Korea, Asia, Taiwan and General models] Front L/R.....................................................................135 W/ch Center.........................................................................135 W/ch Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch Surround Back L/R [HTR-5067/TSR-5770].................135 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A. and Canada models] HTR-4067: Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)................................110/130/160/180 W HTR-5067/TSR-5770: Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)................................120/140/170/190 W • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation AV 4 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) .................................................................70 dB/50 dB or more • Volume Control Range..............................................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Step.................................................................................0.5 dB • Tone Control Characteristics Bass Boost/Cut .............................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz Bass Turnover ................................................................350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut.......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) [Other models] H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround).................................12 dB/oct. HTR-4067: H.P.F. (Surround Back [HTR-5067/TSR-5770])..........12 dB/oct. Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω)..........................................110/130/160 W L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct. HTR-5067/TSR-5770: Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω)..........................................120/140/170 W • Damping Factor Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω............................. 120 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance AV 4 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω).............................. 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Signal AV 4 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................2.3 V • Output Level / Output Impedance AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER........................................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance AV 4 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................. 100 mV/470 Ω • Frequency Response AV 4 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ..........................+0/-3 dB APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 117 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 118 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Video Section General • Video Signal Type • Power Supply [U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Taiwan and General models] ... NTSC [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Other models].................................................................... PAL [Taiwan and General model] • Video Signal Level [China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz Component [Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω [Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω [U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................50 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response Component ............................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off .............. 0.1 W or less HDMI Control On, Standby Through Auto (No Signals) .......................................................................0.3 W (Minimum) HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals) [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz .......................................................................... 1.0 W (Typical) [Asia, Taiwan and General models] [HTR-5067/TSR-5770] .......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz Network Standby On Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Wired ............................................................... 2.3W (Typical) Wi-Fi ................................................................ 2.8W (Typical) Wireless Direct ................................................ 3.1W (Typical) HDMI Control On, StandbyThrough On (No Signals), Network Standby On ........................................................ 3.3W (Typical) Mono................................................................................ 71 dB [HTR-4067] Stereo .............................................................................. 70 dB Network Standby On .......................................... 2.3W (Typical) • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono................................................................................. 0.5% Stereo ............................................................................... 0.6% • Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced AM section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz [Asia, Taiwan and General models] * Specifications are subject to change without notice. [Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Tuning Range • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) [HTR-4067]...................................................... 8.0 kg (17.6 lbs) • Power Consumption ........................................................260 W FM Section [Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz [HTR-5067/TSR-5770]..................................... 8.1 kg (17.9 lbs) .......................................AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω • Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Weight HDMI Control On, StandbyThrough On (No Signals), Network Standby On ........................................................ 2.5W (Typical) • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia, Taiwan and General models] ................................600 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ..................... 435 x 161 x 315 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 12-3/8”) • Reference Dimensions (with attaching wireless antenna) [HTR-5067/TSR-5770] ................................................. 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz ..................... 435 x 221 x 327 mm (17-1/8” x 8-3/4” x 12-7/8”) [Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz * Including legs and protrusions APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 118 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 119 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Index Symbols Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 88 Auto Preset (FM radio, Option menu) 50 Automatic speaker setting optimization 38 Automatic station preset (FM radio) 50 AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 88 Envelope icon (p) 97 Lock icon (o) 89 Numerics 2.1-channel system 14 2ch Stereo (sound program) 46 3.1-channel system 14 4.1-channel system 14 4K Ultra HD 113 5.1-channel system 13, 16 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) 5ch Stereo (sound program) 46 6.1-channel system 13 7.1-channel system 13, 16 7ch Stereo (sound program) 46 B B RATE (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 Banana plug 17 Basic playback operation 42 BASS (sound mode) 48 Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 73 BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 79 Bitrate (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 Bitstream 113 Bookmark Off (Internet radio, Option menu) 66 Bookmark On (Internet radio, Option menu) 66 13 A A.DRC (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 73 Access denied (error indication) 106 Access error (error indication) 106 Access Point Scan (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) Action Game (sound program) 45 Adaptive DRC (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 73 Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 86 ADVANCED SETUP menu 94 Adventure (sound program) 45 AirPlay 67 AM radio listening 49 Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 83 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 112 ARC (HDMI, Setup menu) 84 Audio Decoder (front display information) 71 Audio file format (PC/NAS) 110 Audio file format (USB storage device) 110 Audio In (Option menu) 75 Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 83 Audio Return Channel (ARC) 112 C 33 Cellar Club (sound program) 46 Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 79 Center Image (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85 Center Width (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85 Chamber (sound program) 46 CHAN (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 Channel (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 Check SP Wires (error indication) 106 Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 40 CINEMA DSP 45 CINEMA DSP 3D 45 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85 Clear Preset (FM/AM radio, Option menu) 51 Clock Time (Radio Data System) 52 Compressed Music Enhancer 48 Configuration (HDMI, Setup menu) 83 Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 79 Connection (Information, Setup menu) 91 Crossover (Speaker, Setup menu) 80 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 38 D DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 90 DC Overloaded (error indication) 106 Decoder Off (front display information) 71 Default Gateway (Information, Setup menu) 91 Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 91 Default setting restoration 95 DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 91 Digital Media Controller (DMC) 92 Dimension (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85 Dimmer (Function, Setup menu) 89 DIRECT (sound mode) 48 Direct playback 48 Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 107 Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 81 DLNA 60 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 92 DMC Control (Network, Setup menu) 92 DNS Server (Information, Setup menu) 91 DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 91 Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 73 Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 47 Dolby Pro Logic II (surround decoder) 47 Dolby Pro Logic IIx (surround decoder) 47 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 73 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 73 Drama (sound program) 45 DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 107 DSP Level (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 73 DSP Parameter (Sound, Setup menu) 85 DSP Program (front display information) 71 DSP/Surround (Option menu) 73 DTS Neo:6 (surround decoder) 47 DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 73 Dynamic Range (Volume, Setup menu) 86 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 119 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 120 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM E ECO (Setup menu) 88 ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 88 Enhancer (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 74 ENHANCER (sound mode) 48 EQ Select (Equalizer, Setup menu) 81 Equalizer (Speaker, Setup menu) 81 Error indication (front display) 106 EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 73 EXTD (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 73 Extended Surround (DSP/Surround, Option menu) Extra Bass 48 Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 80 HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 83 HDMI OUT (TV) (Audio Output, Setup menu) HDMI signal compatibility 113 Headphones 46 High definition audio 113 HTC Connect 110 I 73 F Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 92 Firmware update 96 Firmware update (network) 96 Firmware update (USB) 96 Firmware Version (Network Update, Setup menu) Firmware version check 96 FM radio listening 49 FM/AM radio tuning 49 FORMAT (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 Format (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 Frequency (FM/AM radio) 49 Frequency step setting 49, 95 Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 79 Front display (part names and functions) 8 Front display brightness 89 Front display information 71 Front panel (part names and functions) 7 Function (Setup menu) 89 G GEQ (Equalizer, Setup menu) 81 H Hall in Munich (sound program) Hall in Vienna (sound program) HDMI (Setup menu) 83 46 46 93 In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 74 Indicator (part names and functions) 8 Information (Network, Setup menu) 91 Information display (front display) 8 Information switching (front display) 71 INIT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95 Initial Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 86 Input (front display information) 71 Input Rename (Function, Setup menu) 89 Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 74 Interlock (Option menu) 75 Internal Err. (YPAO error message) 40 Internal Error (error indication) 106 Internet radio listening 64 IP Address (Information, Setup menu) 91 IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 91 iPod charge 53 iPod content playback 53 iPod content playback (AirPlay) 67 iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 67 L Language (Setup menu) 93 Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 81 Level Error (YPAO warning message) LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 108 Lipsync 108 Lipsync (Option menu) 74 Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 86 Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 108 41 MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 92 MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 92 Manual Setting (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 34 Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 50 Max Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 86 Media sharing setup 60 Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 89 Menu language selection 27 Monaural reception (FM radio) 49 Mono Movie (sound program) 45 MOVIE (sound program category) 45 Multiple room playback 69 MUSIC (sound program category) 46 Music Video (sound program) 46 Muting 42 N NAS (Network Attached Storage) 25, 60 NAS content playback 61 Network (Setup menu) 91 Network Attached Storage (NAS) 25, 60 Network Connection (Network, Setup menu) 91 Network information 91 Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 92 Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 92 Network Update (Network, Setup menu) 93 No content (error indication) 106 No device (error indication) 106 No Front SP (YPAO error message) 40 No MIC (YPAO error message) 40 No Signal (YPAO error message) 40 No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 40 Noisy (YPAO error message) 40 Not available (error indication) 106 Not connected (error indication) 106 NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95 O M MAC Address (Information, Setup menu) 83 91 Option menu 72 Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 41 Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 41 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 120 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 121 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM P PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95 Panorama (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85 PC content playback 61 PEQ (Equalizer, Setup menu) 81 Perform Update (Network Update, Setup menu) 93 PIN Code (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 33 Please wait (error indication) 106 Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 79 Power management 88 Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 90 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 51 Program Service (Radio Data System) 52 Program Type (Radio Data System) 52 R Radio Data System information 52 Radio Data System tuning 52 Radio Text (Radio Data System) 52 Rear panel (part names and functions) 9 RemID Mismatch (error indication) 106 Remote control (part names and functions) 10 Remote control ID setting 95 REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95 Rename (input name) 89 Rename (network name) 92 Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 56 Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 63 Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 59 Roleplaying Game (sound program) 45 S SAMPL (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 Sampling (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 40 Scale (Volume, Setup menu) 86 SCENE (HDMI, Setup menu) 84 Scene configuration 43 SCENE function 43 SCENE link playback 43 Sci-Fi (sound program) 45 Security (Information, Setup menu) 91 Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 86 Setup menu 76 Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 30 Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 56 Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 63 Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 59 Signal Info (Option menu) 74 Signal information 74 SILENT CINEMA 46 Simple play (iPod) 55 Sleep timer 10 Sound (Setup menu) 85 Sound field effect 45 Sound mode selection 44 Sound program 45 SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94 Speaker (Setup menu) 79 Speaker impedance 12 Speaker impedance setting 15, 94 Speaker placement 12 Spectacle (sound program) 45 Sports (sound program) 45 SSID 108 SSID (Information, Setup menu) 91 Standard (sound program) 45 Standby Sync (HDMI, Setup menu) 83 Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 83 Station preset (FM/AM radio) 50 Status (Information, Setup menu) 91 Stereo reception (FM radio) 49 STRAIGHT (sound mode) 47 Straight decode 47 Subnet Mask (Information, Setup menu) 91 Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 91 Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 79 Subwoofer Phase (Speaker, Setup menu) 80 Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 74 SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 47 Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 80 Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 80 Surround decoder 47 SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 74 System ID (Network Update, Setup menu) 93 T Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 82 The Bottom Line (sound program) 46 The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 46 Tone Control (Option menu) 73 TP (Traffic Program) 52 Traffic information (Radio Data System) 52 Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 52 Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 73 TU (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95 TV Audio Input (HDMI, Setup menu) 83 TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 95 U Unable to play (error indication) 106 UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 96 USB Overloaded (error indication) 106 USB storage device content playback 57 User Cancel (YPAO error message) 40 V V IN (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 V OUT (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 96 Version error (error indication) 106 Video In (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 Video Out (Option menu) 75 Video Out (Signal Info, Option menu) 74 Video signal flow 110 Video signal type setting 95 Video/audio input jack combination 22 Virtual CINEMA DSP 46 Virtual CINEMA FRONT 46 Virtual CINEMA FRONT (Speaker, Setup menu) 81 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 121 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 122 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 6 Voltage selection 26 Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 86 Volume Interlock (Option menu) 75 Volume Trim (Option menu) 74 VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 6 vTuner ID (Information, Setup menu) 91 W Wi-Fi 108 Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) 91 Wireless (Wi-Fi) (Network Connection, Setup menu) 30, 91 Wireless Direct (Network Connection, Setup menu) 36, 91 WPS 108 WPS Button (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 32 WPS button configuration 31 Y Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 38 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) YPAO error message 40 YPAO microphone 38 YPAO warning message 41 38 Z ZB.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 70 Zone B 69 Zone B (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 79 Zone B operation 70 Zone B preparation 69 Zone B volume adjustment 70 ZoneB Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 70 ZoneB Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 87 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 122 00_HTR-4067_5067_om_En.book Page 123 Monday, November 18, 2013 12:50 AM © 2014 Yamaha Corporation YG067A0/EN-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
Yamaha TSR-5770 de handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha TSR-5770 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha TSR-5770 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha TSR-5770 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha TSR-5770 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha TSR-5770 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha TSR-5770 Bedienungsanleitung
- português: Yamaha TSR-5770 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha TSR-5770 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha TSR-5770 Omistajan opas
- svenska: Yamaha TSR-5770 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha TSR-5770 El kitabı
